6 Fulfillment

• Reserving Inventory and Generating Pick Slips
• Confirming and Billing Shipments
• Setting Up the Fulfillment Tables
• Shipping Zone Reservation
• Order Broker Drop Ship Integration

Reserving Inventory and Generating Pick Slips

Topics in this part:

• Reviewing Reservation Types describes the three types of reservations: Immediate, Batch, and Interactive.
• Reviewing Other Reservation Conditions discusses other reservation conditions, such as: Coordinate grouping, drop ship reservations, special handling reservations, and reserving inventory for sets and variable sets.
• Working with Interactive Reservation (MIRV) discusses creating, changing, deleting, and displaying order information using this reservation type.
• Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation provides an overview on preparing an order for pick slip generation.
• Performing Pick Slip Generation includes locating the pick slip generation function, printing pick slips, performing cubing, selecting pick locations, replenishing stock, and using cart/bin picking.
• Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) includes creating, changing, deleting, and displaying vendors for drop ship processing.
• Displaying Pick Slip Generation Inquiry (DPSI) describes this management tool.
• Working with Pick Slip Messages (WPSM) describes creating, changing, deleting, and displaying pick slip messages.
• Processing Drop Ship Orders by Batch (MDSB) describes how to generate drop ship picks by batch for selected vendors.
• Printing the Carryover Report (PCOR) describes how to generate the Carryover reports.
• Generic Pick Out API describes how to generate the outbound pick slip message for integration with another system.
• Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut) describes the Pick Message from the Order Management System.

  For more information see the Web Services Guide on https://support.oracle.com My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

• Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) describes a streamlined version of the pick slip generation option.
• Pick Print Eligibility (WPPE) determines whether the system will include picks for a specified order in the next pick slip generation run for the selected pick slip generation template.
• Unlock Pick Slip (MUPI) allows you to unlock a pick slip.

Working with Interactive Reservation (MIRV)

Purpose: Use this option to reserve stock for specific orders, customer classes, or items via an interactive entry program. You can use interactive reservation in conjunction with Immediate Reservation. Interactive reservation enables you to selectively distribute stock over many orders, or to manually select preferred customers to receive inventory.

You can also use the interactive reservation program to reserve any backordered zone-reservation-coded items not reserved through the zone reservation process. Zone-reservation-coded items are excluded from normal backorder processing.

Quotes: Inventory on quotes is not eligible for interactive reservation; see Entering Pre-Order Quotes for an overview and required setup.

In this topic:

• Scanning for Orders
• Interactive Reservation Screen
• Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen
  • Display Order Detail Reserve Information Screen
  • Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen
  • Display On Hand by Warehouse Screen
  • Display Item Warehouse Screen (Displaying Item Warehouse Details)
  • Display Reserved Order Lines Screen
• Scan Orders by Customer Class Screen
• Work with Reservations by Item/SKU Screen

Scanning for Orders

Use the Interactive Reservation Screen to select an order number, customer class, or item/SKU for reservation.

• Order numbers are unique numbers assigned by the system to identify an order.
• Customer class codes are used to restrict certain customers who order in large quantities from immediate reservation in order entry.
• Item/SKU codes represent units of inventory.

When you enter information in any of these fields, you advance to the next screen based on the first field that has an entry. For example, if you enter an order number and a customer class, you first advance to the Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen, and then to the Scan Orders by Customer Class Screen.

Pick slip preparation: The system removes any pick slip preparation from an order when you:

• scan by order number.
• scan by customer class and select an order.
• scan by item/SKU and perform an action against an item on the order.

When you exit Interactive Reservation, the system determines if the order qualifies for pick slip preparation, and if so, applies it to the order. See Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation.

Interactive Reservation Screen

How to display this screen: Enter MIRV in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Interactive Reservation from a menu.

Field	Description
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Enter a valid order number to advance to the Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen. If you enter an invalid order number, you advance to the Scan by Order Number screen. Inventory on quotes is not eligible for interactive reservation: Quotes cannot be reserved. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Customer class	A code to identify a group of customers. You can direct offers to specific classes of customers or generate lists by customer class code. Enter a valid code to advance to the Scan Orders by Customer Class Screen. Customer class codes are defined in and validated against the Customer Class table; see Setting Up the Customer Class Table (WCCL). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Item/SKU	The code that represents the item/SKU. Enter a valid code (both item and SKU) to advance to the Work with Reservations by Item/SKU Screen. Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional. SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.

Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select items for review, or to work with reservations by warehouse.

How to display this screen: Complete the Order # field on the Interactive Reservation Screen.

Field	Description
Shp (Ship to number)	A system-assigned number that represents the number of shipping addresses for the order. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ln# (Line number)	A system-assigned detail line number on the order. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item	A code used to identify a unit of inventory. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
COLR SIZE OTHR	A code used to further define the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Qty avail	The quantity of the item that is available to sell in this warehouse. A negative number indicates the item is backordered. The calculation for availability is: On hand quantity - Quantity reserved - Quantity protected - Pending transfers - Backordered quantity Takes into account only reservable locations. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Qty prot (Quantity protected)	The quantity of the item that can be reserved only through Interactive Reservation where inventory is dispersed manually, as in the case of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers. The system uses this field to reserve the component items on a finished good work order if Use Work Order Processing (E37) is selected in the System Control table. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR) for more information on work orders. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty open (Quantity open)	The total number of units that have not shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Qty rsrvd (Quantity reserved)	The quantity of the item that is set aside for existing orders. Increases by immediate and interactive reservation and decreases by confirmation or pick void/reprint. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Qty to reserve	The number of units of the item that you want to reserve for this order. Numeric, 5 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display order details	Select Order detail for an order detail line to advance to the Display Order Detail Reserve Information Screen.
Display reserve by warehouse details	Select Reserve by Warehouse for an order detail line to advance to the Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen.
Display reserved order lines	Select Reserved Order Lines for an order detail line to advance to the Display Reserved Order Lines Screen.

Display Order Detail Reserve Information Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review reservation information for an order detail line.

How to display this screen: Select Order detail for an order detail line on the Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen.

Field	Description
Order	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field to the right of the order number)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Order # field. Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number 1. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Line number (Unlabeled field to the right of the ship-to number)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Ship-to field. The line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Order lines are presented in descending sequence so that the most recent order line displays first. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Status	The status of the order detail line. Valid values: B = Express Bill C = Canceled E = Error H = Held S = Sold out X = Closed Blank = Open Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Item	A code and description of the unit of inventory on an order detail line. If a SKUed item is displayed, the SKU information will also appear. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Override warehouse	The code and description of the warehouse that supersedes the default warehouse, defined in the System Control table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Backorder warehouse	The code and description of the warehouse that the order detail line was backordered from. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Backorder date	The date when the order detail line was printed on the backorder notification form. This form is sent to a customer when an order detail line is delayed in shipping. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Backorder reason	The reason an order detail line was backordered. Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.
Bypass reservation	A code which indicates whether the item is flagged to bypass reservation in order entry. Selected = The item is flagged to bypass reservation in order entry. Unselected = The item is not flagged to bypass reservation in order entry. Note: If the Use OROB for Fulfillment Assignment (M31) system control value is selected, the system uses the Bypass reservation flag to send orders to Order Broker for fulfillment assignment.
Drop ship flag	Indicates whether this item is an item that you typically do not stock in inventory; drop ship items must be ordered and shipped from your supplier (vendor). These types of items are not generally available for Reservation. The system creates a separate pre-generated pick for drop ship items to print and forward to the vendor. Additionally, drop ship items must be billed via a special drop ship billing program (because the vendor must notify you when the items have shipped so that you do not bill the customer before the merchandise is received). Valid values: Drop Ship = Drop ship item Regular = Regular item Display-only.
Future order	Valid values: Selected = Indicates that this is a future order. Unselected = Indicates that this is a current order. How the system evaluates future orders: 1) The system adds today's date and the Reservation Lead Days (B27) and compares this value against the Arrival date on the order. If the result is greater than the Arrival Date, the system: Considers the order to be a future order and inventory will not be reserved. Flags each detail line on a future order for future reservation. 2) Typically, you run the Evaluate Future Orders program each evening to evaluate each order detail line marked as a “future order.” The system adds today's date to the Reservation Lead Days value and compares the result against the order's Arrival Date. This comparison determines when inventory can be reserved for a future order. When the result is less than or equal to the Arrival Date, the “future order” flag will be removed from each detail line on the order and each line will be eligible for reservation.
Expected ship date	The date on which a purchase order that can fulfill this order line is expected. This date takes into account PO layering, where previously-backordered items will be fulfilled from new PO receipts, prior to new backordered lines. This means that the next purchase order due to be received may not be the purchase order to fulfill this line. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Reserve date/time	The date and time that inventory was matched to this order detail line. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format, HHMMSS format); display-only.
Ordered	The number of units of this item on the order detail line. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Reserved	The number of units of the item reserved during the Reservation program. This program reserves stock for specific orders. Quantities may or may not have picks created for them. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Printed	The number of units of the item, on this order detail line, for which pick slips have been printed. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Shipped	The quantity on this order detail line that has been shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Canceled	The quantity on this order detail line that has been canceled. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Returned	The quantity on this order detail line that has been returned. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Sold out	The quantity on this order detail line that has been sold out. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review reservation information by warehouse. This information is listed according to the item's quantity available to sell, the item's quantity that cannot be reserved except through interactive reservation, and the number of units of this item that will be reserved.

How to display this screen: Select Reserve by Warehouse for a detail line on the Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen.

Field	Description
Order	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field to the right of the order number)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Order # field. Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number 1. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Line number (Unlabeled field to the right of the ship-to number)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Ship-to number. The line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Order lines are presented in descending sequence so that the most recent order line displays first. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Qty open (Quantity open)	The total number of units that have not been shipped. This includes quantity on backorder and quantity held. Future shipments and drop ships are not included in this number. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty rsrved (Quantity reserved)	The quantity of the item that is set aside for existing orders. Increases by immediate and interactive reservation and decreases by confirmation or pick void/reprint. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Sold to	The name of the customer who placed the order. Validated against the Customer Sold-to table. Alphanumeric, 15 positions (first name), 1 position (initial), 25 positions (last name); display-only.
Item	A code and description of the unit of inventory on an order detail line. If a SKUed item is displayed, the SKU information will also appear. Validated against the Item table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Whs (Warehouse)	A code that represents the default warehouse. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Warehouse name	A description of the default warehouse. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
Quantity available	The quantity of the item that is available to sell. A negative number indicates the item is backordered. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Quantity protected	The quantity of the item that can be reserved only through Interactive Reservation where inventory is dispersed manually, as in the case of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers. The system uses this field to reserve the component items on a finished good work order if the Use Work Order Processing (E37) system control value is selected. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR). Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty to reserve (Quantity to reserve)	The number of units of this item to reserve for this order. Order Lines Flagged for Van Delivery If the ship via on the order line (or the ship via on the order header if one is not defined for the order line) matches the ship via defined in the Default Van Delivery Ship Via (L07) system control value, the system prevents you from reserving against a warehouse other than the reserve warehouse defined for the order line. In this situation, if you try to enter a quantity to reserve against a warehouse other than the one defined for the order line, the system displays an error message: Van Delivery cannot be reserved from warehouse. In order to reserve against another warehouse, you must first update the ship via for the order line to a via other than the van delivery ship via. See Van Delivery Processing for an overview. Numeric, 5 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display locations	Select Display Locs for a warehouse to advance to the Display On Hand by Warehouse Screen.
Review warehouse details	Select Warehouse details for a warehouse to advance to the Display Item Warehouse Screen (Displaying Item Warehouse Details)
Review order details	Select Order Detail to advance to the Display Order Detail Reserve Information Screen.
Review reserved lines	Select Reserved Lines to advance to the Display Reserved Order Lines Screen.

Display On Hand by Warehouse Screen

Purpose: This screen displays on-hand inventory for items in a particular warehouse location.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen, select Display Locs for the warehouse you want to view.

Field	Description
Warehouse	A code that represents the default warehouse. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item	A code and description of the unit of inventory on the order detail line. If a SKUed item is displayed, the SKU information will also appear. Item: alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only. SKU: alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only. Description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions, display-only.
Location	A user-defined code that represents a warehouse location where merchandise is stored. The warehouse location code can consists of a zone/aisle/shelf/bin combination, or it can be any user-defined code. The location code prints on picks slips and reports. Example: The location A010201 indicates: Zone Aisle Shelf Bin A 01 02 01 See Creating and Maintaining Locations (WLOC). Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On hand	The actual on-hand quantity for the item in this warehouse location. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Printed	The number of units currently “allocated” for this item in this warehouse location, determined by the number of picks generated for this location. When determining locations to reserve during Reservation, the system subtracts the printed quantity from the on-hand quantity in this location to determine the quantity available for Reservation. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Display Item Warehouse Screen (Displaying Item Warehouse Details)

Purpose: This screen displays detail information for items in a specified Item/SKU Warehouse.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen, select Warehouse details for the warehouse you want to view. All fields on this screen are display-only.

Field	Description
Item	The item code. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	A code that further identifies the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Warehouse	The code and description of the default warehouse. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Reservation freeze	Indicates whether the item or SKU in this warehouse is frozen. Valid values are: Selected = The item/SKU warehouse is frozen. Unselected = The item/SKU warehouse is not frozen. If an item or SKU warehouse is frozen: Pick Slip Generation will ignore the item warehouse when determining where inventory should be picked to fulfill an order. See Performing Pick Slip Generation. Inventory will not reserve during Order Entry. See Reviewing Reservation Types.
Economic order qty	The optimum ordering quantity for this item/SKU, based on a set of criteria such as: quantity, cost, etc. Used for inventory reporting purposes and by Purchasing. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Backorder qty	The quantity of the item needed to fill existing orders, which must be fulfilled through PO receipts. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Protected qty	The quantity of the item that can be reserved only through Interactive Reservation where inventory is dispersed manually, as in the case of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers. The system uses this field to reserve the component items on a finished good work order if Use Work Order Processing (E37) is selected in the System Control table. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR). Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Min qty	The minimum on-hand quantity for the item/SKU in this warehouse. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Reorder qty	The quantity of the item that should be ordered when inventory reaches the minimum stock level (defined in the Min Qty field). Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Max qty	The maximum on-hand quantity for the item/SKU in this warehouse. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Reserve qty	The quantity of the item/SKU that is set aside for existing orders. Increases by immediate, batch, or interactive reservation and decreases by confirmation or pick void/reprint. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On hand qty	The actual on-hand quantity for the item in this warehouse location. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
S/H reserve qty	The quantity of this item in this warehouse that has been reserved and is undergoing some type of special handling, such as monogramming, hemming, etc. Increased by the Reservation program. Items that are flagged with a special handling code in Order Entry or Order Maintenance increment this field following reservation. Decreased by Confirmation or Pick Void/Reprint. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
On order qty	The quantity of this item due to be received in this warehouse through purchase orders. This information helps the customer decide whether to order now or to cancel the order because of inventory unavailability. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Reserve transfer quantity	The quantity of the item that is earmarked for an inventory transfer. This quantity cannot be used by the Reservation program to match inventory to new orders. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Protect min/max	This field is not currently implemented. Included only if the Use Store File (G15) system control value is selected.
Cost of goods	Represents the vendor cost at which this item in this warehouse was purchased. The cost of the item is updated when the item is confirmed for shipment. Used in item profitability analyses. Note: The Display Cost in Inventory (A38) secured feature controls the display of this field. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Picks generated	The total number of pick slips generated for this item in this warehouse, life-to-date. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Dollars returned	The dollar value of all returns that have been entered to date for this item in this warehouse. Updated by the Return Authorization process when the return is accepted. Updated with the actual dollars returned based on the amount charged when the item was shipped. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Units returned	The number of units of this item in this warehouse returned to date. Updated by the Return Authorization process when returns are entered and updated. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Dollars sold	The actual amount sold (shipped and billed) for this item/SKU to date. Updated with the actual merchandise amount billed on the shipment, during Billing. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Units sold	The number of sales for this item/SKU in this warehouse to date. Updated during Billing. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Protect price	This field is not currently implemented. Included only if the Use Store File (G15) system control value is selected. An error message indicates if you try to change this value and you do not have authority to the Maintain Item Warehouse Retail Price (A91) secured feature: Not authorized to change.

Display Reserved Order Lines Screen

Purpose: This screen displays order line information. This information is listed according to company; warehouse; quantity reserved, quantity printed, and quantity remaining; and reservation date and time.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen, select Reserved Lines.

Field	Description
Order	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field to the right of the order number)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Order # field. Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number 1. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Line number (Unlabeled field to the right of the ship-to number	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Ship-to field. The line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Order lines are presented in descending sequence so that the most recent order line displays first. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Qty ordered	The number of units of this item ordered on this order line. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty reserved	The quantity of the item/SKU that is set aside for this order. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Cmp (Company)	The company for which you are viewing records. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Whs (Warehouse)	A code that represents the warehouse from which the order line was reserved. Validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Quantity reserved	The quantity of the item/SKU that is set aside for this order. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Quantity printed	The number of units for which a pick slip has been printed. The system updates this field when it creates a pre-generated pick for the order line, incrementing this number by the quantity on the Pick Control Detail; see Applying Pick Slip Preparation to an Order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Quantity remaining	The difference between the quantity reserved and the quantity printed. The system updates this field when it creates a pre-generated pick for the order line, decreasing this number by the quantity on the Pick Control Detail; see Applying Pick Slip Preparation to an Order. Only records with a remaining quantity greater than zero will be selected. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Reservation date	The date the item on the order detail line was reserved. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Reservation time	The time the item on the order detail line was reserved. Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.

Scan Orders by Customer Class Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to display the customer(s) that you want to work with. Customer classes restrict certain customers from immediate reservation. For example, there may be some customers who should not be included in immediate reservation due to the volume of merchandise ordered, or the type of items ordered.

How to display this screen: On the Interactive Reservation Screen, enter the customer class you wish to work with, or prompt click on the arrow in the Customer class field to display a list of customer classes.

Field	Description
Order #	A system-assigned code that represents a customer order number. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Order date	The order processing date. Defaults to the current date. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Status	The status of the order detail line. Valid values: Open Cancelled Closed Error Held Purged Suspended Optional.
Type	A user-defined code that indicates how the order was received, such as mail order, telephone order, retail, etc. Alphanumeric, 1 position; optional.

Select Work with detail for an order to advance to the Work with Order Detail Reservations Screen.

Work with Reservations by Item/SKU Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to display the order information for a particular item that you want to work with.

How to display this screen: On the Interactive Reservation Screen, enter an item/SKU, or prompt click on the arrow in this field to display a list of items and then a list of SKUs associated with an item.

Field	Description
Item	A code and description for a unit of inventory on an order detail line. If a SKUed item is displayed, the SKU information will also appear. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
COLR SIZE OTHR	The SKU code; a code that further defines the item. The three elements are defined in the System Control table and validated against the SKU Element (1, 2, 3) tables. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Qty avail (Quantity available)	The quantity of the item that is available to sell in all warehouses. A negative number indicates the item is backordered. The calculation for availability is: On hand quantity - Quantity reserved - Quantity protected - Pending transfers - Backordered quantity Takes into account only reservable locations. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Qty prot (Quantity protected)	The quantity of the item that can be reserved only through Interactive Reservation where inventory is dispersed manually, as in the case of large wholesale orders or preferred mail order customers. The system uses this field to reserve the component items on a finished good work order if Use Work Order Processing (E37) is selected in the System Control table. See Finished Good Work Order Processing (WWOR), for more information on work orders. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Shp (Ship-to number)	This system-assigned number represents the number of shipping addresses for the order. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Ln # (Line number)	A system-assigned detail line number on the order. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Sold-to name	The name of the customer who placed the order. Validated against the Customer Sold-to table. Alphanumeric, 15 positions (first name), 1 position (initial), 25 positions (last name); display-only.
Qty open	The number of units of this item that have not shipped.
Qty rsrvd (Quantity reserved)	The number of units of the item that are set aside for existing orders. Increases by immediate and interactive reservation and decreases by confirmation or pick void/reprint. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Qty to reserve	The number of units of this item that are to be reserved for this order. Numeric, 5 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display order detail information	Select Display order detail for an order to advance to the Display Order Detail Reserve Information Screen.
Display reservations by warehouse details information	Select Reserve by warehouse for an order to advance to the Work with Reservations by Warehouse Screen.
Display reserved order lines	Select Reserved order lines for an order to advance to the Display Reserved Order Lines Screen.

Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP)

Overview: Use Select Vendors for Drop Ship Processing to select one, several, or all vendors for processing drop ship purchase orders or picks. Each vendor code entered on the screen is validated against Working with Vendors (WVEN). If you do not select any vendors, all vendors are eligible for drop ship processing. Completing this screen automatically generates drop ship purchase orders, pick slips, the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut), or invoices; also, if the vendor is flagged to use the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration, the drop ship purchase order is automatically sent to Order Broker. See Drop Ship Processing for a process overview.

Drop ship items are items that you do not stock in inventory. When a customer places an order for a drop ship item, you order the item from your supplier (vendor). The vendor ships the item directly to your customer.

Generating drop ship pick slips by batch: You can generate drop ship pick slips by batch for selected vendors using Processing Drop Ship Orders by Batch (MDSB); however, you cannot generate drop ship purchase orders through that menu option. Batch processing of drop ship pick slips is available only for vendors whose Drop ship output field is set to Drop Ship Pick.

Scheduling drop ship orders: You can use the Drop Ship Processing DSHPROC periodic function (program name FLRDSHP ) to schedule drop ship order processing for all drop ship purchase orders or pick slips. See Scheduling Jobs for more information.

Quotes: Drop ship items on quotes are not eligible for drop ship processing until the quote is converted to an order; see Entering Pre-Order Quotes for an overview and required setup.

Emailing drop ship purchase orders not available: Regardless of the setting of the Email Purchase Order (K80) system control value, sending drop ship purchase orders by email is not supported. See that system control value for more information.

Bypassing printable pick slips not available: Even if the Bypass Creation of Pick Forms during WSPS Pick Generation (K55) system control value is selected, the Select Vendors for Drop Ship Processing option still creates printable pick slips for eligible vendors. This system control value controls the generation of printable pick slips only when you use the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) option.

Submitting ship-for-pickup orders to the Order Broker: If an order originating in Order Management System that is selected for drop ship processing is flagged to ship to a store location for customer pickup, the process sends a Submit Order request to the Order Broker. See Ship-for-Pickup Orders for an overview.

Checking status for retail pickup or delivery orders: If a retail pickup or delivery order from the Order Broker is selected for drop ship processing, the process sends a status inquiry request to the Order Broker to confirm that the order has not been canceled since the last update on its status was received. See Retail Pickup (including Ship-for-Pickup) or Delivery Orders for an overview.

Drop ship authorization records in W status? Pick slip generation displays an error message if there are drop ship authorizations in W status. See DROPSHIP Authorization Records in W Status for a discussion.

In this topic:

• Select Vendors for Drop Ship Screen
• Drop Ship Processing
• Possible Drop Ship Output
• Reports

Select Vendors for Drop Ship Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select vendors for drop ship processing and also to select whether to print drop ship purchase orders or generate the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut).

How to display this screen: Enter MDSP in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Select Vendors for Drop Ship Picks from a menu.

Field	Description
Vendors	A code that defines the supplier of an item. Validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN). To select one or more vendors, enter the vendor number(s); otherwise, to select all vendors, leave the vendor fields blank. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Print drop ship purchase orders	Indicates whether the system prints drop ship purchase orders for the vendors specified in the Vendor field. You can select the sort sequence in which the drop ship purchase orders print. The sort option used previously defaults. Valid values are: Blank = The system does not print drop ship purchase orders. Purchase order print = The system prints drop ship purchase orders in purchase order number sequence. The system uses the PO Print Program for PO Print in PO Sequence (C76) system control value to print drop ship purchase orders in purchase order number sequence. Vendor print = The system prints drop ship purchase orders in vendor number sequence. The system uses the PO Print Program (C64) system control value to print drop ship purchase orders in vendor number sequence. Setup: Drop ship purchase orders print only for vendors whose Drop ship output field on the second Vendor screen is set to Drop ship purchase order . Drop ship pick slip/invoice: When you print a drop ship purchase order, the system also prints a Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice. If a vendor’s Drop ship output field is set to Drop ship pick , the system prints a drop ship pick slip/invoice instead of a drop ship purchase order. To print: See Possible Drop Ship Output for information on how to print drop ship purchase orders or pick slips/invoices. PO download trigger: The system creates a purchase order download Add trigger record when the purchase order is printed. Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.
Fax invoices/picks to vendors	Indicates whether the drop ship pick slips/invoices should be faxed to the vendor instead of, or in addition to, printing. This option is not currently implemented.

Screen Option	Procedure
Continue to process drop ships, even if there is a pick slip generation error	Select Accept. The system sends all records in the CC Authorization Transaction table to the Authorization Service, including the authorization associated with the non-drop ship order. See Drop Ship Processing for an overview of how to handle any errors.
Return to Drop Ship Processing without processing drop ships	Select Reject. You return to the Select Vendors for Drop Ship Screen so you can correct any pick slip generation error before processing drop ships. See Drop Ship Processing for an overview of how to handle any errors.

Drop Ship Processing

The system performs the following procedures during drop ship processing:

#	Step
1.	An order is flagged as “Drop Ship” in order entry because it includes a drop ship item.
2.	The system checks the Item/SKU to determine the primary vendor assigned to the item/SKU that was ordered.
3.	The system processes credit card authorizations on the drop ship orders, if needed. The setting of the Authorize Only Merchandise for Drop Ship (C92) system control value determines the amount to authorize. Any orders whose credit cards are declined for authorization are not included in the drop ship process; see Using the Credit Card Authorization Interface. Note: If you process drop ships for all vendors, the system requests a single authorization for an order; however, if you process drop ships for selected vendors, the system requests a separate authorization for each vendor associated with a drop ship item on an order.
4.	The system then checks the Vendor table to see if the Drop ship output field on the second Vendor screen is set to Drop ship pick, Drop ship purchase order, or OROB drop shipping (Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module). If the Drop ship output field for the vendor is set to: Drop ship purchase order , the system generates a Purchase Order AND a Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice. Once the vendor confirms the order, you can confirm the shipment manually, using the Purchase Order Receipts menu option. Drop ship pick, the system generates a Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice or the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut). Once the vendor confirms the order, you can confirm the shipment manually, using the Manually Confirming Shipments (MCON) menu option. The system then produces the Drop Ship Batch Confirmation Report, which allows you to review the total costs of items on the drop ship pick slips. See Possible Drop Ship Output for an overview of output options. OROB drop shipping , the system automatically sends the drop ship purchase orders to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module for processing. See Interface with Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment Module: Overview and Setup for background. The system also: generates a drop ship pick slip/invoice when sending the drop ship purchase order to Order Broker based on the settings described under Possible Drop Ship Output. creates a pick download trigger (File code of PCH) in the IL Outbound Trigger table when generating a drop ship pick slip/invoice if the Create Generic Pick Download Triggers (I31) system control value is selected. The PICK_OUT process in Working with Integration Layer Processes (IJCT) generates the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut) for each of these trigger records.
5.	The system produces several reports related to drop ship processing; see Reports.

Note:

A drop ship order line is not eligible for processing until the current date plus the number of Lead days on the Create Vendor Item Screen equals or exceeds the Arrival date for the order line.

Example: On October 1, you enter an order for a drop ship item supplied to your customers by vendor 789. At the customer’s request, you enter an Arrival date of December 15 . The vendor item’s specified number of Lead days is 10. The order line is not eligible for processing until December 5.

PICKGEN auth records in W status: A pop-up window opens when you process drop ships if the system finds a pick control header record with a pick status of W (waiting for authorization) for a non-drop ship order paid with a credit card was not authorized during a previous pick slip generation process due to transmission failure.

The system creates a record in the Pick Control Header table when you generate pick slips. The pick control header record remains in a W pick status until the corresponding authorization transaction in the CC Authorization Transaction table receives an approved authorization. A pick slip is not produced until the credit card on the order receives an approved authorization.

When you see this pop-up window during drop ship processing, you can either:

• select Accept to generate drop ship orders without first re-sending the authorization transaction associated with the pick control header record in a W pick status for authorization. When you perform drop ship processing, the system sends all authorization records in the CC Authorization Transaction table to the authorization service for authorization, including the authorization transaction associated with the pick control header record in a W status. If you do this, a record remains in the Pick Control Header table for the non-drop ship order, but the corresponding authorization record no longer exists in the CC Authorization Transaction table. To generate a pick slip for the order, you need to delete the record from the Pick Control Header table and generate pick slips again.

  Note:

  When you generate pick slips again, the system sends an authorization transaction to the authorization service for the order that was stranded in the Pick Control Header table. You need to make sure that you do not receive a double authorization for the order since the authorization transaction associated with the order was sent to the authorization service when you performed drop ship processing.

Note:

You will continue to see this pop-up window when you process drop ships until you delete the record in the Pick Control Header table.

• select Reject to return to the Select Vendors for Drop Ship Screen without processing drop ships. You can verify with the authorization service whether the authorization associated with the pick control header record in a W status was received.
  • If the authorization was received by the authorization service, use the Reprocess Authorizations Screen (RPAA) to receive the authorization response. If the order receives an approved authorization, the system generates the pick slip and updates the record in the Pick Control Header table to a Z (authorized) or M (submitted to PC Manifest) status.
  • If the authorization was not received by the authorization service, check the CC Authorization Transaction table to verify that only the authorization transaction for the order exists. Then, use the Reprocess Authorizations Screen (RPAA) to resend the authorization transaction for authorization. If the order receives an approved authorization, the system generates the pick slip and updates the record in the Pick Control Header table to a Z (authorize) or M (submitted to PC Manifest) status.

    Note:

    If authorization transactions exist in the CC Authorization Transaction table for drop ship orders, the system sends the authorization transactions to the authorization service when you reprocess authorizations.

Possible Drop Ship Output

Depending on setup, the system can generate a printed copy of a Purchase Order, a Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice, or the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut), or various combinations. The conditions required to produce each type of output are described below. Also, if the vendor meets the conditions for more than one type of output, the system produces all qualifying output types. For example, if the vendor meets the conditions to print both drop ship purchase orders and pick slips/invoices, then all four outputs are produced.

The system prints a drop ship PO when:

• the vendor’s Drop ship output field is Drop ship purchase order , and
• the vendor’s Print PO field is selected , and
• the Print drop ship purchase orders field at the Select Vendors for Drop Ship Screen is set to Vendor print or Purchase order print.

The system prints a drop ship pick slip/invoice when:

• the system prints a drop ship PO (see above for the requirements).
• the vendor’s Drop ship output field is Drop ship pick or OROB drop shipping .

A separate drop ship pick slip/invoice prints for each ship-alone item if the Print One Drop Ship Invoice per Ship Alone Item (E38) system control value is selected ; however, this system control value does not apply to drop ship purchase orders sent to Order Broker.

The system also creates pick download triggers (File code of PCH ) in the IL Outbound Trigger table when you generate a drop ship pick slip/invoice if the Create Generic Pick Download Triggers (I31) system control value is selected . The PICK_OUT process in Working with Integration Layer Processes (IJCT) generates the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut) for each of these trigger records.

Note:

The system deletes the drop ship pick slip/invoice once the associated drop ship purchase order is closed or cancelled and all IL Outbound Trigger records (WOIT) for the purchase order and drop ship pick slip/invoice are in an X Closed status.

Multiple items? The Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship Pick (C82) system control value controls whether to include multiple items on a drop ship pick slip, or to generate separate pick slips; similarly, the Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship PO (M13) controls whether to include multiple items on a drop ship purchase order, or to generate multiple purchase orders. See each system control value for more information.

Reports

The system produces the following reports during drop ship processing:

• Vendor Drop Ship Worksheet: Generated whenever you run drop ship processing.
• Drop Ship Purchase Order List: Generated when you process drop ship purchase orders. This list does not include drop ship pick slips.
• Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice: Generated when you process drop ship pick slips. The system also generates a drop ship pick slip/invoice when you generate drop ship purchase orders.
• Purchase Order: Generated for drop ship purchase orders when you enter Purchase order print or Vendor print in the Print drop ship purchase orders field on the Select Vendors for Drop Ship screen.
• Declined Drop Ships: Generated whenever you run drop ship processing.
• Credit Card Authorization Listing: Generated for drop ship orders requiring credit card authorization.
• Address Verification Response List: Generated for drop ship orders requiring credit card authorization and AVS verification.

Print program: The system uses the Drop Ship Pick Print Program (E92). If this system control value is blank, the system uses the Pick Printing Program (C37). The standard pick slip printing program name is PICKG (graphical form).

Active procedure: When you accept you entries at this screen, the system creates an active procedure so that another user cannot process drop ship orders while the program is already running. A second batch job will be aborted if it is submitted while the first batch job is active.

Displaying Pick Slip Generation Inquiry (DPSI)

Purpose: Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry is a management tool that allows you to monitor warehouse performance and pick slip generations. This option provides a detailed listing of the picks that have been generated and their current status.

Pre-printed pick slips: Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry does not include pick slips in a pre-printed status (G Generated No Authorization or H Generated Has Authorization); see Creating Pre-Generated Picks.

In this topic:

• Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry Screen
• Display Picks for Batch Screen
• First Display Pick Control Header Screen
• Second Display Pick Control Header Screen
• Work with Pick Details Screen
• Display Pick Control Details Screen
• Display Pick Locations Screen

Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry Screen

How to display this screen: Enter DPSI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry from a menu.

Field	Description
Date	The date the pick slip was printed. This is the date for the first pick slip in the batch sorted in cart batch number, pick control number sequence. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Time	The time the pick slip was printed. This is the time for the first pick slip in the batch sorted in cart batch number, pick control number sequence. Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Billing batch	A system-generated batch number that is assigned to each pick slip run. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Pick # range	Each pick slip is assigned a number; this field displays the range of pick slip numbers that were picked. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Total printed	The total number of pick slips that were printed, for each date. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Cnfrm (Confirmed)	The total number of pick slips that were shipped and billed, for each date. This is the number of pick slips that are in a Confirmed (C) status. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Packd (Packed)	The total number of pick slips that were packed. This is the number of pick slips that are a Packed (P) status. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Void	The total number of pick slips that were voided. This is the number of pick slips that are in Void (V) status. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Suspd (Suspended)	The total number of pick slips that have been suspended. This is the number of pick slips that are in a Suspended (S) status. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Outsd (Outstanding)	The total number of pick slips that have been printed, but not yet confirmed. This is the number of pick slips that are in a Manifest (M) or Carryover (O) status. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display picks	Select Display Picks for a pick to advance to the Display Picks for Batch Screen.

Display Picks for Batch Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review pick information including the batch number, pick number, printed/confirmed date, and the status of the pick.

How to display this screen: Select Display Picks for a pick at the Display Pick Slip Generation Inquiry Screen.

Field	Description
Billing batch #	A system-generated batch number that is assigned to each pick slip run. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pick #	The system-assigned control number for this pick. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Printed	The date the pick was printed. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Confirmed	The date the pick was shipped and billed. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Status	The status of this pick. Valid values: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for Authorization Authorized Optional.
Reprint	The pick control number that has been reprinted. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display pick control header information	Select Display for a pick to advance to the First Display Pick Control Header Screen.
Work with pick details	Select Details for a pick to advance to the Work with Pick Details Screen.

First Display Pick Control Header Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review complete pick information including the control and billing batch numbers, pick status, generation type, date/time for last update, confirmation, printing, number of labels, cartons, zones, warehouse, and drop points.

Select OK at this screen to advance to the Second Display Pick Control Header Screen, where you can review additional pick control header information.

How to display this screen: Select Display for a pick at the Display Picks for Batch Screen.

Field	Description
Control #	The control number assigned to a batch of picks. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Billing batch #	A system-generated batch number that is assigned to each pick slip run. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pick status	The description of the pick's status. Valid values: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for Authorization Authorized Display-only.
Generation type	The type of pick slip being generated. Valid values: Regular = no special requirements Drop/Ship = requires drop ship processing Special/Handling = includes special handling items Master = includes all items in the pick slip run. Display-only.
Date/time last update	The date and time this pick was last changed. Printing the pick is considered to be a change. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format, HHMMSS format); display-only.
By	The process that created the Pick Control Header record. From the Last update by user field in the Pick Control Header table. See Creating Pre-Generated Picks for a list of processes. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Date/time printed	The date and time this pick was printed. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format, HHMMSS format); display-only.
# of labels	The total number of labels printed for this pick slip. Used in the following situations: If you decide to print multiple labels for this pick slip manually. If the system divides an order into multiple pick slips, each one will get a unique control number. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
# of labels scanned	The total number of shipping labels scanned, or wanded, for this pick. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Cart batch #	The system-assigned number that represents the batch pick slip list for each cart. If the system determines that there is not enough bins in the cart to accommodate the batch, a new cart/batch number is created. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
# of cartons	The number of cartons required to ship each order. Determined by the Cubing feature. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Pick zones (1-6)	The warehouse zone(s) on this pick slip. The System Control table value, Maximum Number of Zones (B41), defines the maximum number of zones (up to 6) on a pick slip. Example of how pick zones are used: A pick slip with items to be picked in zones A, B, and D will not be included in the same batch as a pick slip with items to be picked in zones A, B, and R. However, a pick slip with items to be picked in zones A, B, and D will be included in the same batch as a pick slip with items to be picked in zones A and D. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Include on S/J	Selected = Indicates that this pick slip should be included on the Sales Journal report. Unselected = Indicates that this pick should not be included on the Sales Journal report.
# of lines	The number of items on the pick slip. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via	The code that represents the carrier for this order. Validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Hazard code	A user-defined code used to categorize an item as a hazardous material that requires special storage and/or handling. Validated against the Item Hazard table; see Working with Hazardous Item Codes (WHAZ). This information is passed to TanData. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Warehouse	A code that represents the default warehouse. Validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Drop point	A code that represents a location to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse. Drop points are UPS facilities, typically. Drop points print as the return address on the pick slip and are the destination to which undeliverable packages are returned. Drop points are used in zone skipping. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Second Display Pick Control Header Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review additional pick information, such as the order number and customer information.

How to display this screen: Select OK at the First Display Pick Control Header Screen.

Field	Description
Control #	The control number assigned to this batch of picks. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Reprinted control #	The control number assigned to the batch of picks that have been reprinted. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Merch	The total value of merchandise. A total of the item price multiplied by the quantity ordered and does not include freight, additional charges, tax, or handling. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Freight	The total charge for shipping an order. Does not include any additional charges associated with shipping the order. Based on the freight method defined for the source code on the order. The total may depend on the quantity or weight of items ordered, or on the dollar value of the order as a whole. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Add’l freight	The total dollar value for additional freight charges, above the order's regular shipping charges. The total of the additional freight charges defined for the shipper(s). Additional freight charges are defined in the Ship Via table. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Add’l chgs	The total extra charges added to the order. Additional charges can be: Service charges, based on the dollar value of the merchandise, Additional shipping charges, or Guaranteed service charges. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Handling	The total charge for special handling or gift wrapping. The full total of the handling charges for each item multiplied by the quantity ordered. The SKU/Offer table controls whether the item is eligible for special handling and the charge for special handling. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Tax	The total sales tax on the order. Based on the merchandise value. The system calculates sales tax for the order by multiplying the merchandise amount by the tax rate for the shipping destination. See Entering Orders for additional information. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
GST	Canadian Goods and Services tax. A tax method is defined for each postal code to accommodate the varying tax requirements in each province, when shipping from Canada. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
PST	Provincial Services tax. A tax method is defined for each postal code to accommodate the varying tax requirements in each province, when shipping from Canada. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Paid	The amount paid by the customer. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Total order	The sum of all charges including merchandise, freight, additional freight, tax, handling, and additional charges. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Due	The balance due. If this is a credit, the system displays the amount with CR beside the value. The amount due is calculated by subtracting the Paid amount from the Total Order amount. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
PO #	The customer's purchase order number. Alphanumeric, 15 positions; display-only.
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Customer #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify a customer. Every customer on the system is assigned a customer number. Numeric, 9 positions; display-only.
Name	The name of the customer who placed the order. Alphanumeric, 15 positions (first name), 1 position (initial), 25 positions (last name); display-only.
Company name	The name of the company that placed the order. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Address	The customer's street address. Alphanumeric, 32 positions; display-only.
Apartment	The customer's apartment, suite, rural route, or floor number. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
City/St/Postal/ Cntry	The city, state, postal zip code, and country where the customer receives mail or shipping. State codes are defined in and validated against the State table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 25 positions (city), 2 positions (state), 10 positions (postal code), 3 positions (country); display-only.
Delivery code	Identifies whether the customer is Business or Residential. Used to determine shipping charges. Valid values: Business Residential Display-only.
PO box?	Indicates whether the shipper will deliver packages to a post office (P.O.) box. Any address in which P.O. Box or APO/FPO appears must be delivered to a post office box. Selected = the shipper delivers packages to post office boxes. Unselected = the shipper does not deliver packages to post office boxes.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display detail lines	Select Display Detail Lines to advance to the Work with Pick Details Screen.

Work with Pick Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the line number, item and SKU information, and the quantity printed.

How to display this screen: Select Detail Lines at the First Display Pick Control Header Screen or the Second Display Pick Control Header Screen.

Field	Description
Line #	A system-assigned detail line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Order lines are presented in descending sequence so that the most recent order line displays first. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item	A code that represents a unit of inventory on an order detail line. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	A code that further identifies the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Quantity printed	The number of units of the item printed and the quantity which should be shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display pick control details	Select Display for a line to advance to the Display Pick Control Details Screen.
Display pick locations	Select Locations for a line to advance to the Display Pick Locations Screen.

Display Pick Control Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the pick control details for each order line.

How to display this screen: Select Display for an order line on the Work with Pick Details Screen.

Field	Description
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Ship-to #	Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number 1. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Seq # (Sequence number)	A number assigned to a warehouse location and used to verify the location number that is either entered, scanned, or system-loaded. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Control #	The control number assigned to a pick slip. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line #	The line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Order lines are presented in descending sequence so that the most recent order line displays first. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only (assigned by the system).
Item	A code that represents a unit of inventory on the order detail line. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	A code that further identifies the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Original print qty	The original quantity that was printed on the pick. This becomes important if the quantity on the pick is changed. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty printed	The number of units of the item printed and the quantity which should be shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty packed	The number of units of the item packed and the quantity which should be shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty ordered	The number of units of the item ordered. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Qty B/O (Quantity backordered)	The number of units of the item backordered. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Price	The system price of a single unit of the item. The price is assigned by the system, but may be overridden in Order Entry. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Extension	The total price of the order. Calculated by multiplying the Unit Price by the Quantity Shipped. Numeric, 11 20 with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Special handling	The charge for special handling a single unit of the item. The SKU/Offer table controls whether the item is eligible for special handling and the charge for special handling. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Extension	The total special handling charges for the order. Calculated by multiplying the Special Handling charge by the Quantity Shipped. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Gift wrap	The charge for gift wrapping a single unit of the item. The SKU/Offer table controls whether the item is eligible for gift wrapping and the charge for gift wrapping. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Extension	The total gift wrapping charges for the order. Calculated by multiplying the Gift Wrap charge by the Quantity Shipped. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Freight	The total charge for shipping an order. Does not include any additional charges associated with shipping the order. The system performs this calculation based on the freight method defined for the source code on the order. The total may depend on the quantity or weight of items ordered, or on the dollar value of the order as a whole. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Tax	The total sales tax on the order. Based on the merchandise value. The system calculates sales tax for the order by multiplying the merchandise amount by the tax rate for the shipping destination. See Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) and Working with Customer Tax Status. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
GST (Canadian Goods and Services tax)	A federal-level tax that may apply to orders within Canada. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
PST (Provincial Services tax)	A province-level tax that may apply to orders within Canada. Numeric, 20 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.
Line status	The status of the order detail line. Valid values: C = Cancel H = Hold Blank = Open Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Backorder control	Specifies what action should be taken for this line. Valid values: C = Ship and cancel remainder X = Backorder and cancel order Blank = Ship and backorder the remainder. Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Effect inventory (Effect on inventory)	Indicates whether this order detail line affects the inventory count. For example, you may not want a mailer that is included in each shipment to be reflected in your actual inventory count. selected = This order detail line affects inventory count. unselected = This order detail line does not affect inventory count.
Carton #	The number assigned to the carton by the system. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Cart bin #	The number assigned to the cart/bin by the system. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Requires special (Requires special handling)	Indicates whether or not this order detail line requires special handling. selected = This order detail line requires special handling. unselected = This order detail line does not require special handling.

Display Pick Locations Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the warehouse, zone, location, quantity picked and cart batch information.

How to display this screen: Select Locations for an order line at the Work with Pick Details Screen.

Field	Description
Whs	A code that represents the primary warehouse. Validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display only.
Zone	The zone(s) in the warehouse that is used for this pick slip. You can have up to 6 zones on a pick slip. The Maximum Number of Zones (B41) system control value defines the maximum number of zones on a pick slip. Numeric, 3 positions; display only.
Location	A code that represents a warehouse location where merchandise is stored. The warehouse location code can consist of a zone/aisle/shelf/bin combination, or it can be any user-defined code. The location code prints on picks slips and reports. Example: The location A010201 indicates: Zone Aisle Shelf Bin A 01 02 01 Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display only.
Qty picked	The quantity of the item that has been picked from this warehouse. Numeric, 3 positions; display only.
Cart batch	The batch pick slip list that is assigned to each cart. Numeric, 3 positions; display only.

Working with Pick Slip Messages (WPSM)

Purpose: The Work with Pick Slip Messages screen is used to create, change, delete, or display messages. Messages to be included on pick slips can be customer service messages, warehouse messages, gift messages, etc. The format of the message determines where the message will print.

In this topic:

• Work with Pick Slip Messages Screen
• Create Pick Slip Message Pop-up Window

Work with Pick Slip Messages Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WPSM in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Field	Description
Message	A code that represents the message. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new pick slip message	Select Create to advance to the Create Pick Slip Message Pop-up Window.
Change a pick slip message	Select Change for the Opt field to advance to the Change Pick Slip Message window. At the Change window you can change any information except the Message number. See Create Pick Slip Message Pop-up Window for field descriptions.

Create Pick Slip Message Pop-up Window

To create a pick slip message: At the Work With Pick Slip Message screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Message	A code that represents the pick slip message. Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Message text	You can enter up to 3 lines of message text. This free-form message text will print on each pick slip. Alphanumeric, 40 positions (each line); required.

Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS)

Purpose: Use streamlined pick slip generation to:

• Create and work with pick slip generation templates that determine the pre-generated picks to select for pick slip generation.
• To advance to the Display Operations Control Summary Screen.
• Generate pick slips for a selected pick slip generation template.

Pick slip generation options: Pick slip generation options define the criteria to use when selecting pre-generated picks for pick slip generation. You can select pre-generated picks for generation based on a specified:

• warehouse
• source category
• ship via
• pay type
• item
• status (H Generated Has Authorization status)
• order
• line of business
• location class
• arrival date range
• sold to customer
• state
• postal code range
• number of pick lines

In addition, you can select pre-generated picks for generation based on whether the associated order is flagged as a gift order, the pick contains a single line, or an item on the pick contains a special handling code, requires gift wrapping, or is flagged as oversized.

Generating pick slips: The system uses the pick slip generation options, system control values, and order information to create the pick slip. When you select Generate Picks for a pick slip generation template, the system submits a batch job (PICK_GEN) to perform batch authorization, allocate stock, sort the pick slips, and print the picking documents. See Performing Pick Slip Generation for an overview and processing details.

Bypass printable pick slips? You can expedite the pick slip generation process even further by omitting the generation of printable pick slips. To do so, select the Bypass Creation of Pick Forms during WSPS Pick Generation (K55) system control value. For example, you might select this option if you use the Generic Pick Out API to communicate with your warehouse management system and do not need to print pick slips. For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1). Also see the Bypass Creation of Pick Forms during WSPS Pick Generation (K55) system control value for a discussion of the differences in processing and print output when you omit printable pick slip generation.

Scheduling pick slip generation: You can schedule when pick slip generation runs for a particular pick slip generation template using a periodic function whose Program name is PFR0107 and whose Parameter matches the pick slip generation template’s Description. See Scheduling Pick Slip Generation for instructions.

Picks not included? If you run pick slip generation and the system does not include the picks you were expecting, you can use Pick Print Eligibility (WPPE) to determine the reason why the picks for an order were not included.

About Zones

The term Zone is used in three specific contexts in pick generation:

• UPS or Parcel Post Shipping zones: These shippers have divided the country into zones, which are used to determine shipping charges. UPS and Parcel Post shipping zones are defined in and validated against the SCF Ship Via table. See Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV).
• Geographic zones: Geographic zones are regions of the country which relate to weather conditions. Geographic zones are used in zone reservation processing to control shipping dates for weather-sensitive (zone reservation coded) inventory such as plant stock. Geographic zones are defined in and validated against the Geographic Zone table. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview.
• Warehouse zones: A warehouse zone is the major subdivision within a warehouse. Typically, a warehouse location is identified by zone, aisle, shelf and bin. For example, the location A010203 typically indicates Zone A, Aisle 01, Shelf 02, and Bin 03. Warehouse zone is a criterion for sorting pick slips as they are printed. In addition, you can specify warehouse zones and/or a range of aisles for replenishing your pickable locations. See Creating and Maintaining Locations (WLOC).

For more information: See Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation and Performing Pick Slip Generation.

In this topic:

• Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen
• Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen
• Select Warehouse for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Source Categories for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Shipper for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Pay Type for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Items for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Orders for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Lines of Business for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Location Class for Pick Slip Screen
• Select Customers for Pick Slip Screen
• Select State for Pick Slip Screen

Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the streamlined pick slip generation options in your company, to create or change an option, and to generate pick slips or the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut).

For more information see the Web Services Guide on https://support.oracle.com My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

How to display this screen: Select Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation from a menu or enter WSPS in the Fast path field at the top of any menu.

Pick slip generation option description: The only field displayed on this screen is the Description of the pick slip generation option. This is a 50-position, alphanumeric field. You can edit the description at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new pick slip generation option	Select Create to advance to the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen, where you can create a new pick slip generation template.
Delete a pick slip generation option	Select Delete for a pick slip generation template to delete it. Note: When you delete a pick slip generation template, the system does not delete its associated periodic function used to schedule when pick slip generation runs for the template; you must use Working with Periodic Functions (WPER) to delete the periodic function. See Scheduling Pick Slip Generation for more information.
Review or change a pick slip generation option	Select Options for a pick slip generation template to advance to the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen, where you can review the current settings and change them if needed.
Generate pick slips	Select Gen Picks for a pick slip generation template to submit the PICK_GEN job. By default, this job is submitted to the PICKGEN job queue at the Job Management Screen rather than the QBATCH job queue. Note: In order to avoid errors during pick slip generation, DO NOT route the PICK_GEN job away from the PICKGEN job queue. The PICKGEN job queue processes one job at a time. If a PICKGEN job is running and another job is submitted, the job remains in a RDY status until the PICKGEN job queue is available to process it.

Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a new streamlined pick slip generation template, or to review or modify an existing template.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen to create a new option, or select Options at that screen for an existing option.

Field	Description
Description	A description of the pick slip generation option. Scheduling pick slip generation: The system automatically creates a periodic function for the pick slip generation template if you select the Create Periodic Function flag and the template’s Description is 7 characters or less. Note: The Description must be 7 characters or less because the maximum length for the periodic function name is 7 positions. Also, in order to create a periodic function for the template, the description cannot contain a single quote (’). See Scheduling Pick Slip Generation for further instructions. If you use multiple companies: If you create a periodic function for a pick slip generation template and you use more than one company, you must make sure the Description for each pick slip generation template is unique across companies. Alphanumeric, 50 positions; display-only if a periodic function for the pick slip generation template exists, otherwise, required.
Max # of picks	The maximum number of picks to pick. This is the number of pre-generated picks (picks in a G Generated No Authorization or H Generated Has Authorization status) in the Pick Control Header table to select for pick slip generation. 0 = No limit. If you enter a number in this field, the system selects pre-generated picks, starting with the lowest order number. Note: If an order is split into multiple picks, the system may select some of the pick for the order for generation and leave the others for another pick slip generation run. See Splitting an Order Across Multiple Picks. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.
Gift orders only	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on the setting of the Gift order field for the Order Ship To (displayed on the Display Order Properties Screen in Order Inquiry). selected = The system prints pick slips for orders whose Gift order field is selected. unselected = The system prints pick slips for gift and non-gift orders.
Selected warehouses	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected warehouse(s). selected = You advance to the Select Warehouse for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select warehouses for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified warehouse(s). unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid warehouses.
Selected source categories	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected source categories. selected = You advance to the Select Source Categories for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select source categories for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks whose source code at the order header level is associated with a source code category selected for pick slip generation. If a pre-generated pick includes items that are not associated with the selected source category, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid source code categories.
Selected shippers	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected ship vias. selected = You advance to the Select Shipper for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select ship vias for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified ship via(s). unselected = The system prints picks for all valid ship vias.
Selected payment types	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected pay types. selected = You advance to the Select Pay Type for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select pay types for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified pay type(s). unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid pay types.
Selected/excluded items	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected items. selected = You advance to the Select Items for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select to include or exclude items for pick slip generation. For items to include, the system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip as well. For items to exclude, the system does not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system excludes these items from printing until the item that is flagged to exclude has been removed from the pre-generated pick. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid items.
Preauthorized orders only	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation that are in an H Generated Has Authorization status. Valid values: selected = The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks in an H Generated Has Authorization status. Note: When Selecting Pre-Generated Picks for Pick Slip Generation, the system looks at Authorization History to determine if any picks in an H Generated Has Authorization status are associated with an expired authorization, and if so, the system changes the status of the pick to G Generated No Authorization. unselected (default) = The system does not consider the status of the pre-generated pick when generating pick slips, and sends credit cards up for authorization during pick slip generation if they have not already received an authorization response; see Authorizations During Pick Slip Generation. Note: If Preauthorized orders only is unselected, the system does not generate pick slips for orders that contain a credit card payment method if the authorization service defined for the pay type is set up as online authorization only (the Batch/online field is set to I). See Performing Online Credit Card Authorizations for an overview of the online credit card authorization process.
Selected orders	Allows you to select up to 100 individual orders for pick slip generation. selected = You advance to the Select Orders for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select orders for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that are associated with the specified order(s). unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid orders.
Selected lines of business	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected lines of business. selected = You advance to the Select Lines of Business for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select lines of business for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that are associated with the specified line(s) of business. unselected (default) = The system prints pick slips for all lines of business.
Selected location classes	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected location classes. selected = You advance to the Select Location Class for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select location classes for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain an item associated with the specified location class. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid location classes.
Excluded postal codes	Allows you to exclude specified postal codes from pick slip generation. selected = You advance to the Select Postal Codes to be Excluded Screen, where you can specify the postal codes you wish to exclude from pick slip generation. Note: If you define a Postal code range and also exclude specific postal codes within that range, the system includes all orders that are being shipped to the postal code range minus the specified postal codes that are excluded. For example, if you enter a postal code range of 01701 - 01999 and then exclude 01801 and 01581, the system would exclude 01801 from the postal code range. Postal code 01581 would be excluded regardless since it is outside the specified postal code range. If you exclude a "zip plus 4" postal code, only postal codes that specify the extra 4 digits are excluded; for example, if you exclude 01468-1556, only postal code 01468-1556 is excluded and any postal code that does not specify the extra 4 digits is not excluded. If you exclude a postal code and do not specify the extra 4 digits, then that postal code, regardless of the extra 4 digits is excluded. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid postal codes.
Arrival date range	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on a specified arrival date range. The arrival date is the date when the customer wants to receive the order. To determine the arrival dates to include, the system uses the following calculation: Arrival Date from Order Ship To - (Pick Processing Days (B37) + Ship Via Lead Days in WSHV) < or = Today's Date The system generates pick slips if the system-calculated date on the pre-generated pick is equal to or earlier than today's date; otherwise, the system holds printing the picks until the date is within the allotted time frame (the arrival date range). The starting (first) date you enter must be earlier than the ending (second) date). Also, an ending date is required if you enter a starting date; however, the starting date is always optional. Note: The system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on the arrival date defined for the order ship to; the system does not look at the arrival date defined for an order line. Numeric, two 6-position fields; optional.
Override all orders to via	Allows you to supersede the ship via code on the pick and to ship all orders via the designated shipper whose code you enter here. Ship Via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Pick message code	A code that represents the pick slip message. See Working with Pick Slip Messages (WPSM). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Pick message text	The text of the message. This free-form message will print on each pick slip. See Working with Pick Slip Messages (WPSM). Alphanumeric, 50 positions (each line); display-only.
Selected sold-to customers	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected sold-to customers. selected = You advance to the Select Customers for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select sold to customers for pick slip generation. The system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified sold to customer. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all valid sold-to customers.
Selected states	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on selected or excluded states. selected = You advance to the Select State for Pick Slip Screen, where you can select states to include or exclude for pick slip generation. unselected = The system prints pick slips for all states.
Special Handling	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on the presence of a special handling code for an item. Include = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks regardless of the presence of a special handling code for an item. Only = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks that contain an item that requires special handling. If the pre-generated pick contains other items that do not require special handling, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip. Exclude = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks that do not contain an item that requires special handling. Note: If the Split Special Handling Picks (L44) system control value is selected, the system creates a separate pre-generated pick for items on an order that contain a special handling code; otherwise, pre-generated picks contain items with and without special handling. See this system control value for examples.
Single line picks only	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on the number of pick control detail records. selected = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks that have only one pick control detail. If you select this option, you cannot use the Picks with...X lines or less/more option. unselected = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks regardless of the number of pick control details.
Gift wrap picks only	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation that contain an item that requires gift wrap (the Gift wrap field for one or more of the items on the pre-generated pick is selected). selected = Generate pick slips only for pre-generated picks that contain a gift wrap item. If the pre-generated pick contains other items that do not require gift wrap, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip. unselected = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks regardless of whether a gift wrap item is on the pre-generated pick.
Bulk picks only	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation that contain a bulk item (the Oversized field for the one or more of the items on the pre-generated pick is selected). selected = Generate pick slips only for pre-generated picks that contain a bulk item. If the pre-generated pick contains other items that are not flagged as oversized, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip. unselected = Generate pick slips for pre-generated picks regardless of whether a bulk item is on the pre-generated pick.
Postal code range	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on a specified range of zip codes (up to 10 positions, including numbers and letters). The From postal code cannot be greater than the To postal code. Letters are considered lower than numbers. If you enter a 5 digit postal code, the system includes any 9 digit postal codes that fall within the range; for example, if you enter 01701 to 01901, the system includes pre-generated picks that contain zip code 01880-9999. If you enter a 9 digit postal code, such as 01468-0000 to 01469-0000, the system does not include pre-generated picks that contain zip code 01468 since this zip code is less than 01468-0000. To include 01468 in the postal code range, you must define the range as 01468-01469. If you define a postal code range and also Excluded postal codes within that range, the system includes all orders that are being shipped to the postal code range minus the specified postal codes that are excluded. For example, if you enter a postal code range of 01701 - 01999 and then exclude 01801 and 01581, the system would exclude 01801 from the postal code range. Postal code 01581 would be excluded regardless since it is outside the specified postal code range. Postal codes are defined in and validated against the Postal Code table (WZIP); however, your entries in this field are not validated. Numeric, 10 positions; optional.
Create Periodic Function	Defines whether a periodic function for the pick slip generation template exists so that you can schedule when pick slip generation runs for this template. selected = A periodic function exists for the pick slip generation template. The system selects this flag if a periodic function exists whose Function name and Parameter is an exact match to the Description of the pick slip generation template. unselected = A periodic function does not exist for the pick slip generation template. The system automatically creates a periodic function for the pick slip generation template if you select the Create Periodic Function flag and the template’s Description is 7 characters or less. Note: The Description must be 7 characters or less because the maximum length for the periodic function name is 7 positions. Also, in order to create a periodic function for the template, the description cannot contain a single quote (’). See Scheduling Pick Slip Generation for further instructions. Note: This flag is display-only if a periodic function for the pick slip generation template already exists. If you use multiple companies: If you create a periodic function for a pick slip generation template and you use more than one company, you must make sure the Description for each pick slip generation template is unique across companies.
Picks with...X lines or less/more	Allows you to select pre-generated picks for pick slip generation that contain a specified number of pick lines. You can select to generate picks with X number of pick lines or less or X number of pick lines or more. To generate: Enter the number of pick lines for the picks you wish to include in the pick slip generation run. Select lines or less to include only picks that contain the specified number of pick lines or less. Example: If you enter 5 and select lines or less, the system includes picks that contain 5 pick lines or less. Select lines or more to include only picks that contain the specified number of pick lines or more. Example: If you enter 5 and select lines or more, the system includes picks that contain 5 pick lines or more. If you use this option, the Single line picks only option must be unselected. Leave the Picks with number blank to generate pick slips for pre-generated picks regardless of the number of pick lines on the pre-generated pick. The system uses the Pick Control Detail table to determine the number of lines associated with a pick. See: Applying Pick Slip Preparation to an Order for more information on how the system creates records in the Pick Control Header table and Pick Control Detail table during pick slip preparation. Splitting an Order Across Multiple Picks for more information on the reasons the system may split an order into several pre-generated picks. Creating Pre-Generated Picks for more information on the updates the system makes to the Pick Control Header table and Pick Control Detail table during pick slip preparation. Note: Generating picks based on a specified number of pick lines does not guarantee that the pick will print on a specified number of pages. For example, line messages, special handling, gift wrap, and item comments can affect the number of lines that print on a single page of a pick form; see Pick Slip for more information on its contents. Numeric, 5 positions; optional.

Select this field...	To display the...
Selected warehouses	Select Warehouse for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected source categories	Select Source Categories for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected shippers	Select Shipper for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected payment types	Select Pay Type for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected/Excluded items	Select Items for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected orders	Select Orders for Pick Slip Screen.
Selected line of business	Select Lines of Business for Pick Slip Screen
Selected location class	Select Location Class for Pick Slip Screen
Excluded postal codes	Select Postal Codes to be Excluded
Selected sold to customers	Select Customers for Pick Slip Screen
Selected states	Select State for Pick Slip Screen

Screen Option	Procedure
Review operations control summary information	Select Dsp Flash Rpt to advance to the flash report screens. See Reviewing Operations Control Summary (FLSH).
Review and change existing selection criteria	Select Review to review the options currently selected at the Streamlined Pick Generation screen and to make any changes. If multiple criteria are selected at the Streamlined Pick Generation screen, you advance to the related screen for each selected criterion.
Set selection criteria for this pick slip generation option	Select each desired criterion as described above, and click OK to advance to the related selection screen(s).
Accept your selections	Select Accept to save your selections and return to the Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen. If you selected the Create Periodic Function flag, the system creates a periodic function for the pick slip generation template that you can use to schedule when pick slip generation runs for the template; see Scheduling Pick Slip Generation for more information.
Exit the screen without making changes	Select Exit.

Select Warehouse for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the selected warehouses.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected warehouses field on the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Whs (Warehouse)	A code that represents a warehouse. Warehouses are defined and validated against the Warehouse table (WWHS); see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the warehouse. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Orders avail (Orders available)	The number of orders available for pick slips. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Sel (Selected)	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on warehouse. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this warehouse. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this warehouse.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a single warehouse	Select a warehouse to select it for pick generation. The system selects the Sel field.
Cancel a warehouse selection	Select Cancel for a warehouse to cancel the selection. The system unselects the Sel field.
Select all warehouses	Select Select All. The system selects the Sel field for all warehouses.

Select Source Categories for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with the selected source category.

Note:

• The system selects pre-generated picks whose source code at the order header level is associated with a source code category selected for pick slip generation.
• If a pre-generated pick includes other items that are not associated with the selected source categories, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected source categories field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Src (Source code category)	A category assigned to a group of source codes. Source code categories are assigned in the Source Code table and defined in and validated against the Source Code Category table. See Generating Forecasting Reports. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Category	The description associated with the source code category. Alphanumeric, 40 characters; display-only.
Sel (Selected)	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on source category. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this source category. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this source category.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a single source code category	Select a source code category. The system selects the Sel field.
Cancel a source code category selection	Select Cancel for a source code category to cancel the selection. The system does not select the Sel field.
Select all source code categories	Select Select All. The system selects the Sel field for all pay types.

Select Shipper for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the selected ship via. This screen displays a list of ship via codes that are available for selection.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected shippers field on the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Via (Ship via)	A code that represents the carrier for the pre-generated pick. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the shipper. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Via pty (Ship via priority)	The ship via priority assigned to this ship via. Ship via priority controls how the system allocates inventory to backorders and sorts pick slips. Ship via priority ranges from 0 - 9 where 0 is the lowest priority and 9 is the highest priority. Numeric, 1 position; optional.
Sel (Selected)	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on ship via. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this ship via. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this ship via.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a single ship via	Select a shipper to select it. The system selects the Sel field.
Cancel a ship via selection	Select Cancel for a shipper to cancel the selection. The system does not select the Sel field.
Select all ship vias	Select Select All. The system selects the Sel field for all shippers.

Select Pay Type for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified pay type.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected payment types field on the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Pay type	A user-defined code that represents the method of payment on the order. Each payment type must conform to one of the following categories: Cash/check Credit card Pay types are defined in and validated against the Pay Type table. See Working with Pay Types (WPAY). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the payment type. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Orders avail (Orders available)	The quantity of orders that are available to pick. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Sel (Selected)	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on pay type. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this pay type. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain this pay type.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a single payment type	Select a payment. The system selects the Sel field.
Cancel a payment type selection	Select Cancel for a payment type to cancel the selection. The system does not select the Sel field.
Select all pay types	Select Select All. The system selects the Sel field for all pay types.

Select Items for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to include or exclude specified items during pick slip generation.

• For items to include, the system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip as well.
• For items to exclude, the system does not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system excludes these items from printing until the item that is flagged to exclude has been removed from the pre-generated pick.

Note:

You can specify up to 500 items at this screen. Although the system does not display an error message, it does not accept more than 500 items.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected/Excluded Items field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Item to... Include/Exclude	Defines whether you wish to include or exclude the specified items during pick slip generation. Include = the system performs pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system includes these items on the printed pick slip as well. Exclude = the system does not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain the specified item(s). If a pre-generated pick includes other items, the system excludes these items from printing until the item that is flagged to exclude has been removed from the pre-generated pick.
Item	A code that represents an item. You can specify up to 500 items at this screen. Although the system does not display an error message, it does not accept more than 500 items. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
SKU	The SKU code that further identifies the item. The three elements are defined in the System Control table and validated against the SKU Element (1, 2, 3) tables. If you do not define a SKU for a SKUed item, all SKUs for the item are either included or excluded during pick slip generation, based on the setting of the Item to... Include/Exclude field. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; optional.
Description	A description of the item. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Ord avail (Orders available)	The quantity of the item that is available to sell. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Define items to include or exclude from pick slip generation	Select Add or Change to enter items you wish to include or exclude from pick slip generation. Use the Item to... Include/Exclude field to select whether you wish to Include or Exclude the specified item(s).Select OK to save your changes.
Delete an item from the list	Select Delete for an item to advance to the Confirm Delete window; at this window, select Delete to remove it from the list; otherwise, select Exit to cancel.

Select Orders for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with the specified order. You can specify up to 100 orders at a time.

A message indicates if an order you enter is on hold:

Order (14) is not open. Cannot be selected for Pick Slip.

You can release orders from hold through Release Held Orders. See Selecting Held Orders (ERHO).

How to display this screen: Select the Selected Orders field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. An error message similar to the following indicates if the order is on hold: Order (14) is not open. Cannot be selected for Pick Slip. You can release orders from hold through Release Held Orders. See Selecting Held Orders (ERHO). Maximum number of orders: You can select up to 100 orders at a time for pick slip generation. If you attempt to enter more than 100 orders, the system displays an error message such as: The number of orders selected (121) exceeds the maximum allowed (100). Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Name	The name of the customer who placed the order. Customer names are defined in and validated against the Customer Sold-to table. Alphanumeric, 15 positions (first name), 1 position (initial), 25 positions (last name); display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Add orders	Select Add.
Change selected orders	Select Change. The system displays the orders that you previously entered so that you can review your entries. Note: You cannot change an order number if you are in change mode. You must delete the order and then return to “add” mode and re-enter the order. The system displays a message if you attempt to enter a duplicate order number.

Select Lines of Business for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with the selected lines of business.

The system automatically assigns an order to a line of business in order entry or order maintenance if the order meets the requirements for a specific line of business assignment. See Working with Lines of Business (WLOB).

How to display this screen: Select the Selected lines of business field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Lines selected	The number of lines of business selected to print pick slips. Updated whenever you select or deselect a line of business. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
LOB code	A code used to identify a line of business. Line of business codes are defined in and validated against the Line of Business table. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	A description of the line of business. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.
Sel	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on line of business. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with this line of business. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with this line of business.
Maximum (Maximum line count)	The maximum number of lines of business you can select to print pick slips. You can select up to 100 lines of business. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a line of business	Select the line of business. The system updates the Selected field to selected.
Deselect a line of business	Select Cancel for the line of business to deselect it. The system updates the Selected field to unselected.
Select all lines of business	Select Select All. The system updates the Selected field for all lines of business to selected.

Select Location Class for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain an item associated with the selected location class.

Location classes represent a warehouse location, such as caged area or fragile area. Items, SKUs, and locations can be assigned location classes; however, this pick slip option evaluates the location class assigned to an item at the item level only.

You can assign a location class:

• to a location at the Create Location Screen.
• to an item at the Create Item Screen.

Splitting an order by location class: Order Management System uses the location class defined at the item level to determine if an order should split into several picks; see Splitting an Order Across Multiple Picks.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected Location Classes field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Loc class (Location class	A code that represents a location type, such as caged area or fragile area. Location classes are defined in and validated against the Location Class table; see Creating and Maintaining Location Classes (WLCL). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the location class. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Orders avail (Orders available	The quantity of orders that are available to pick. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Sel (Selected)	Defines whether the system selects pre-generated picks for pick slip generation based on location class. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain an item associated with this location class. No = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that contain an item associated with this location class.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a single location class	Select a location class to select it. The system selects the Sel field.
Cancel a location class selection	Select Cancel for a location class to cancel the selection. The system does not select the Sel field.
Select all location classes	Select Select All. The system selects the Sel field for all location classes.

Select Postal Codes to be Excluded Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to exclude specified postal codes from pick slip generation.

How to display this screen: Select the Excluded postal codes field at the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field

Description

Postal code

A postal code you wish to exclude from pick slip generation. If you define a Postal code range and also exclude specific postal codes within that range, the system includes all orders that are being shipped to the postal code range minus the specified postal codes that are excluded. For example, if you enter a postal code range of 01701 - 01999 and then exclude 01801 and 01581, the system would exclude 01801 from the postal code range. Postal code 01581 would be excluded regardless since it is outside the specified postal code range. If you exclude a "zip plus 4" postal code, only postal codes that specify the extra 4 digits are excluded; for example, if you exclude 01468-1556, only postal code 01468-1556 is excluded and any postal code that does not specify the extra 4 digits is not excluded. If you exclude a postal code and do not specify the extra 4 digits, then that postal code, regardless of the extra 4 digits is excluded. Postal codes are defined in and validated against the Postal Code table (WZIP); however, your entries in this field are not validated. Numeric, 10 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Exclude a postal code	Select Add or Change to enter postal codes you wish to exclude from pick slip generation. Select OK to save your changes.
Delete a postal code from the exclusion list	Select Delete for a postal code to advance to the Confirm Delete window; at this window, select Delete to remove it from the exclusion list; otherwise, select Exit to cancel.

Select Customers for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks associated with the select sold to customer.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected sold-to customers field on the Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Customer #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify a customer who places an order. Customers are defined in and validated against the Customer Sold-to table; see Creating and Updating Sold-to Customers (WCST). Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
Name	The name of the customer who placed the order. Defined in and validated against the Customer Sold-to table. Alphanumeric, 15 positions (first name), 1 position (initial), 25 positions (last name); display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Add a customer selection	Select Add to add sold to customers to the requirements for pick slip generation. The system displays a message if you attempt to enter a duplicate customer number.
Change a customer selection	Select Change. The system displays the customers that you previously entered so that you can review your entries, and optionally delete any entries.

Select State for Pick Slip Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to:

• Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that ship to the specified state(s), or
• Exclude pre-generated picks from pick slip generation that ship to the specified state(s).

Note:

A single pick slip template can have either the Selected field set to Yes (perform pick slip generation for the specified states) or Excl (exclude pick slip generation for the specified states). To use both settings, you must create a pick slip template that includes specified states and create a separate pick slip template the excludes specified states.

How to display this screen: Select the Selected States field at the Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.

Field	Description
Cty (Country)	A code which identifies a country. Countries are defined in and validated against the Country table. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
State	A code which identifies a state. States are defined in Work with Countries. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description	A description of the state. Alphanumeric, 25 positions; display-only.
Sel (Selected)	Indicates whether to perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that ship to this state. Yes = Perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that ship to this state. No (default) = The specified state has not been selected or excluded from pick slip generation. Excl = Do not perform pick slip generation for pre-generated picks that ship to this state. Optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a state	Select a state. The system updates the Selected field to Y.
Deselect a state	Select Cancel for a state to deselect it. The system updates the Selected field to N.
Exclude a state	Select Exclude for a state to exclude the state from pick slip generation. The system updates the Selected field to X.
Select all states	Select Select All. The system updates the Selected field for all states to selected.

Pick Print Eligibility (WPPE)

Purpose: Use this menu option to determine whether the system will include picks for a specified order in the next pick slip generation run for the selected pick slip generation template.

The system determines which pre-generated picks to include in the pick slip generation run, based on the pick slip selection criteria specified on the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen for the selected pick slip generation template.

In this topic:

• Pick Print Eligibility Screen
• Pick Print Eligibility Error Reasons

For more information: See:

• Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation for more information on when the system creates pre-generated picks for an order.
• Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) for more information on generating pick slips based on the criteria defined for a pick slip generation template.

Pick Print Eligibility Screen

Use this screen to enter the order and ship to number you wish the system to evaluate for pick print eligibility when running Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) for the selected pick slip generation template.

How to display this screen: Enter WPPE in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Pick Print Eligibility from a menu.

Field	Description
Order #	The order number and ship to number the system will evaluate for pick print eligibility. The order number is validated against the Order Header table. The order ship to number is validated against the Order Ship To table. To be eligible for pick print, the order and order ship to must be in an Open status and not locked by a user. Order #: Numeric, 8 positions; required. Ship to #: Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Pick Gen Template	The pick slip generation template from Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) the system will use to determine if the pre-generated picks for the specified order will print. Required.

Instructions:

1. Enter the order number and order ship to number you wish to evaluate for pick print eligibility. If you leave the Ship to blank, the system defaults a ship to number of 1.
2. Select the pick slip generation template you wish to use to print picks for the order.
3. Select OK.

The system:

• If a pick exists for the order that is in a status other than G Generated No Authorization, H Generated Has Authorization, or V Void, the system displays the error Pick already printed for order.

  Note:

  The system displays this error even if other picks exist for the order that ARE in a G, H, or V status which could be eligible for pick slip generation. You must process the printed pick through Billing before the system evaluates the other picks for the order.
• If picks do not exist for the order, the system determines if the order is eligible for pick slip preparation.
  • If the order is not eligible for pick slip preparation, the system displays an error message indicating the order is not eligible for Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) because a pre-generated pick does not exist for the order; see Pick Slip Preparation Errors.
  • If the order is eligible for pick slip preparation, the system submits the Pick Gen Refresh periodic function to create pre-generated picks for the order and continues to the next step. See Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation and Applying Pick Slip Preparation to an Order for more information on when an order is eligible for pick slip preparation and the updates that occur.
• If a pre-generated pick exists for the order, the system determines if the pick will print using the selected pick slip generation template.
  • If picks for the order will not print using the selected pick slip generation template, the system displays an error message indicating the order is not eligible for Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) because it does not meet the criteria defined for the selected pick slip generation template; see Pick Errors.
  • If at least one of the picks for the order will print using the selected pick slip generation template, the system displays the message Order meets criteria. However, if a Maximum number of picks has been defined for the pick slip generation template which could prevent the pick from being selected for print, the system displays the message Pick eligible but Max # of Picks limit exists.

Note:

• The system displays the first error encountered for the order; other errors may exist on the order which could prevent the order from being included in the pick slip generation run. Correct the error and run Pick Print Eligibility again to determine if there are any other reasons the order would not be included in the pick slip generation run.
• If one of the picks for the order is eligible for Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) using the selected pick slip generation template, the system considers the order eligible for pick slip generation, even if other picks for the order will not print. Run pick slip generation for the eligible pick and then run Pick Print Eligibility again to determine why other picks for the order are not eligible for pick slip generation.

Pick Print Eligibility Error Reasons

Note:

The pick print eligibility error reasons are system delivered data that displays in the default language selected during installation of Order Management System; see Regional Settings.

Error Message	Reason for Error
General Errors
Pick already printed for order	A pick exists for the order that is in a status other than: G Generated No Authorization H Generated Has Authorization V Void
Reason could not be determined	A reason other than the reasons listed in this chart is preventing the system from printing a pick for the selected order using the selected pick slip generation template. Contact your Order Management System representative to determine the reason for the error.
Pick Slip Preparation Errors	The system displays one of the error reasons below if pre-generated picks do not exist for the order and the order is not eligible for pick slip preparation.
Order Header is in wrong status	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the Order Header is not in an Open status.
Order on hold	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the status of the Order Header is H Held.
Order Header is quote	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the status of the Order Header is Q Quote.
Order Header is currently locked by X	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the order is locked by the specified user ID.
Order Ship To is in wrong status	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the Order Ship To is not in an Open status.
Order Ship To on hold	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the status of the Order Ship To is H Held.
Order is flagged as ship complete	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the order is flagged as a ship complete order; see Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation for more information on when an order is eligible for pick slip preparation.
Order does not have any open order details	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the order does not have any order detail lines that are in an Open status; see Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation for more information on when an order is eligible for pick slip preparation.
Order has a future arrival date	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the Arrival date for the reserved, open order line(s) is a future arrival date. The system uses the arrival date defined for the order line or the order ship to if not defined at the line level; see Arrival Date Calculation.
Cancel date has been exceeded	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the cancel date defined for the Order Ship To falls within the time it takes to process and fulfill the pick slip; see Cancel Date Calculation.
Order contains back ordered line(s)	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the lines on the order are backordered; see Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation for more information on when an order is eligible for pick slip preparation.
Order is coordinate grouped	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because the lines on the order are coordinate grouped together and one or more of the lines is not eligible for pick slip preparation; see Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation for more information on when an order is eligible for pick slip preparation.
Line # 999 has a quantity remaining of 0	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because it contains a reserved order line with a quantity remaining equal to or less than 0.
Line # 999 has a quantity remaining that is > the quantity reserved	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because it contains a reserved order line with a quantity remaining that is greater than the quantity reserved.
Line # 999 has a quantity printed on reserved order line that is > the order detail reserved	Pre-generated picks do not exist for the order because it contains a reserved order line with a quantity printed that is greater than the quantity reserved on the order detail line.
Pick Errors	The system displays one of the error reasons below if a pre-generated pick exists for the order, but it will not print using the selected pick slip generation template.
Cancel date has been exceeded	A pre-generated pick exists for the order, but the cancel date defined for the Order Ship To falls within the time it takes to process and fulfill the pick slip; see Cancel Date Calculation.
Order does not meet criteria	A pre-generated pick exists for the order, but the pre-generated pick does not meet the criteria defined for the selected pick slip generation template.

Unlock Pick Slip (MUPI)

Purpose: Use this option to unlock a pick slip. A pick slip is locked if the In Use By User field in the Pick Control Header table is not blank. This situation might occur if, for example, a user’s browser window closed during pick slip maintenance. Until you unlock the pick slip, you cannot work with it.

Unlock Pick Slip Screen

How to display this screen: Enter MUPI in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Unlock Pick Slip from a menu.

Field	Description
Pick Number	Enter a valid pick control number identifying a pick slip that is currently locked. You cannot prompt on this field. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
	When you enter the number of a locked pick slip, the screen displays the following information:
Status	The pick slip’s current status. Valid statuses are: M = Manifest Submission blank = Open R = Reprinted Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Entered by	The ID that identifies the user who generated the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Customer	The name of the customer associated with the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Completing this screen:

1. Enter a number identifying a pick slip that is currently locked. If your entry is valid, the remaining fields on the screen display information about the pick slip, and a message indicates the pick slip will be unlocked.
2. Select OK. The system:
   • clears the In Use By User field in the Pick Control Header table for the pick slip.
   • deletes any records in the Carton Content table associated with the pick slip.

Processing Drop Ship Orders by Batch (MDSB)

Overview: Use Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch to review the number of drop ship orders available for processing for each vendor and to limit the number of drop ship orders that are processed for each vendor. Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch provides an alternative method for generating drop ship picks in addition to the Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) menu option.

Note:

You can use Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch to generate drop ship pick slips only; this menu option does not generate drop ship purchase orders. See Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) for information on generating drop ship purchase orders.

The Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch screen displays vendors and the number of drop ship picks that are available to generate for each vendor. At this screen, you can define how many picks you wish to print for a vendor and the batch size for the picks that you print.

To review the number of drop ship orders available for processing for each vendor, you must run the Update Available Picks Batch Program.

In this topic:

• Update Available Picks Batch Program
• Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch Program
• Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen

Update Available Picks Batch Program

Select Update Avail Picks at the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen to submit a batch program that updates the number of available picks for drop ship pick generation.

The Update Available Picks batch program evaluates the number of open drop ship orders and updates the Avail picks field and the Last update field for the vendor.

Note:

An open drop ship order is an order that is in open status and includes a drop ship order detail line in open status. An order that is on hold, or an order that is open but includes a drop ship order detail line that is on hold, is not included by the Update Available Picks batch program.

The Update Available Picks batch program:

• reviews each open order detail line to determine if the item on the line is a drop ship item.
• if the item is a drop ship item, identifies the vendor associated with the item.
• uses the Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship Picks (C82) system control value to determine the number of picks eligible for generation for the vendor.
• updates the Avail picks field and the Last update field for the vendor, and displays the values on the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen.
• updates the # picks to release field with the value in the Avail picks field.

The Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen continues to display the calculated number of available picks until you run the Update Available Picks batch program again, or you run the Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch Program.

Example: The Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship Pick (C82) system control value controls whether drop ship pick slips are limited to printing one detail line (item) per pick slip. The program uses this system control value to determine the number of picks that are available to generate for the vendor.

Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship Pick (C82) system control value is unselected

Question	Answer
More than 1 drop ship item on the order?	Each drop ship item on an order that is associated with the same vendor represents 1 pick for that vendor. Example: You order 3 drop ship items and they are all associated with vendor 2398. Results: 1 drop ship pick prints.
Different vendors for the drop ship items on the order?	Each drop ship item on an order that is associated with a different vendor represents 1 pick for each vendor. Example: You order 6 drop ship items: 3 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398), 2 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499), and 1 of drop ship item 3 (vendor 2501). Results: 1 pick prints for vendor 2398, 1 pick prints for vendor 2499, and 1 pick prints for vendor 2501.
Different ship to customers for the drop ship items on the order?	Each drop ship item on the order that is shipping to a different ship-to customer represents a separate pick for each vendor. Example: You order 6 drop ship items for ship-to customer 1: 3 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398), 2 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499), and 1 of drop ship item 3 (vendor 2501) and you also order 3 drop ship items for ship-to customer 2: 2 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398) and 1 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499). Results: 2 picks print for vendor 2398, 2 picks print for vendor 2499, and 1 pick prints for vendor 2501.

Allow Only Single Line on Drop Ship Pick (C82) system control value is selected

Question	Answer
More than 1 drop ship item on the order?	Each drop ship item on an order that is associated with the same vendor represents a separate pick for that vendor. Example: You order 3 drop ship items and they are all associated with vendor 2398. Results: 3 drop ship picks print.
Different vendors for the drop ship items on the order?	Each drop ship item on an order that is associated with a different vendor represents 1 pick for each vendor. Example: You order 6 drop ship items: 3 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398), 2 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499), and 1 of drop ship item 3 (vendor 2501). Results: 3 picks print for vendor 2398, 2 picks print for vendor 2499, and 1 pick prints for vendor 2501.
Different ship to customers for the drop ship items on the order?	Each drop ship item on the order that is shipping to a different ship to customer represents a separate pick for each vendor. Example: You order 6 drop ship items for ship to customer 1: 3 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398), 2 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499), and 1 of drop ship item 3 (vendor 2501) and you also order 3 drop ship items for ship to customer 2: 2 of drop ship item 1 (vendor 2398) and 1 of drop ship item 2 (vendor 2499). Results: 5 picks print for vendor 2398, 3 picks print for vendor 2499, and 1 pick prints for vendor 2501.

Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch Program

Select Submit at the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen to submit a batch program that generates drop ship picks based on the number of picks to release and the batch size you defined for each vendor.

The Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch program:

• reviews each open order detail line to determine if the item on the order line is a drop ship item.
• if the item is a drop ship item, identifies the vendor associated with the item.
• uses the # picks to release field for each vendor to determine how many picks to generate.
• processes credit card authorizations on the drop ship orders, if needed. Any orders that are declined for authorization are not used in the batch size calculation, and picks are not generated for the orders; see Using the Credit Card Authorization Interface.
• creates a batch of picks based on the Batch size and the # picks to release fields defined for the vendor. If the # picks to release is greater than the Avail picks, the program uses the Avail picks to determine the total number of picks to generate.
• runs the Update Available Picks Batch Program to refresh the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen with updated available drop ship pick information. If all picks are generated, the screen will be blank.

Print program: The system uses the Drop Ship Pick Print Program (E92). If this system control value is blank, the system uses the Pick Printing Program (C37). If the Create Generic Pick Download Triggers (I31) system control value is selected, the system also generates the Pick Message from Order Management System (CWPickOut).

For more information see the Web Services Guide on https://support.oracle.com My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

Example:

Vendor	Available Picks	# Picks to Release	Batch Size	Drop Ship Batches Generated
2398	98	20	5	4 drop ship batches are generated containing 5 picks each.
2499	24	28	5	5 drop ship batches are generated: 4 batches containing 5 picks each, and 1 batch containing 4 picks.
2501	9	blank	5	No picks are generated since the # of picks to release is 0.
2603	25	10	15	1 drop ship batch is generated containing 10 picks.

Reports generated:

• Vendor Drop Ship Worksheet (Produced whenever you run drop ship processing.)
• Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice (Always produced for drop ship pick slips.)
• Declined Drop Ships (Produced whenever you run drop ship processing.)
• Credit Card Authorization Listing (Produced for drop ship orders requiring credit card authorization.)
• Address Verification Response List (Produced for drop ship orders requiring credit card authorization and AVS verification.)

Bypassing printable pick slips not available: Even if the Bypass Creation of Pick Forms during WSPS Pick Generation (K55) system control value is selected, the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch option still creates printable pick slips for eligible vendors. This system control value controls the generation of printable pick slips only when you use the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) option.

Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch Screen

Purpose: This screen displays vendors that have open, unshipped drop ship orders available for processing. At this screen, you can define the batch size of the picks processed for each vendor and the number of drop ship orders you would like to release for processing.

Note:

No information displays when you first advance to the Process Drop Ship Orders by Batch screen. To display vendors that have drop ship orders that are available for processing, you must select Update Avail Picks to run the Update Available Picks Batch Program.

How to display this screen: Enter MDSB in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Drop Ship Orders by Batch from a menu.

Field	Description
Fax picks to vendors	Indicates whether to fax the drop ship pick slips. This option is not currently implemented.
Last update	The last date when you submitted the Update Available Picks Batch Program. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Vendor #	A unique number to identify a vendor that has drop ship orders available for processing. The system displays vendors on this screen only if they have open drop ship orders and have the Drop ship pick field selected. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table; see Working with Vendors (WVEN). Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Name	The name of the vendor that has open drop ship orders. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
Avail picks	The number of available drop ship picks that can be generated for the vendor. Calculated when you submit the Update Available Picks Batch Program. The system clears this field when you submit the Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch Program. Numeric, 9 positions; display-only.
# picks to release	The number of available picks to release for drop ship pick batch generation. Leave this field blank if you do not wish to generate drop ship picks for the vendor. Numeric, 9 positions; optional.
Batch size	The number of picks to include in a drop ship batch for a specified vendor before creating a new batch. Example: Batch size = 2 # of picks to release = 5 In this situation, the system generates 3 batches: Batch 1 has 2 picks Batch 2 has 2 picks Batch 3 has 1 pick The vendor’s Drop ship batch size defaults, but you can override it. If you override the batch size on this screen, the system does not update the Drop ship batch size field for the vendor. Numeric, 7 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Submit a batch program to update the number of available picks	Select Update Avail Picks to submit the Update Available Picks Batch Program. A message indicates that the batch program has been submitted: Job 431745/UPD_#PCK submitted.
Submit a batch program to generate the drop ship picks	Select Submit to submit the Generate Drop Ship Picks by Batch Program. A message indicates that the batch program has been submitted: Job 431746/DROP_SHIP submitted.

Printing the Carryover Report (PCOR)

Purpose: Use this screen to generate the Carryover Report.

The Carryover report lists unconfirmed pick slips generated on or before a specified date. Picks with a status of Open, Manifest Submission, CarryOver, Packed (packed), or Reprinted are included.

Print Carryover Report Screen

Use this screen to generate the Carryover Report.

How to display this screen: Enter PCOR in the Fast path field or select Print Carryover Report from a menu.

Field	Description
Pick printed on or before...	The latest print date to include on the Carryover Report. The report lists pick slips printed on or before this date. The current date defaults, but you can override it. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Submit the CARRYOVER job to generate the Carryover reports	Select Submit. The system generates the Carryover Report.

Confirming and Billing Shipments

Topics in this part:

• Manually Confirming Shipments (MCON) describes how to confirm shipments manually, or interactively, using the pick control number, billing batch number (without exceptions), and billing batch number (with exceptions).
• Reprinting and Voiding Pick Slips (WVRP or WSVP) explains how to reprint and void a single pick slip or a range of pick slips.
• Void Pick Batch (WSVP)
• Printing the Fill Rate Reports (PFRR) provides report samples and descriptions of the Fill Rate, Shipment Summary, and Backorder Summary reports.
• Printing the Manifest Audit Report (PMAR) describes how to print a report listing the status of upload records received from the PC manifest.
• Printing Additional Pick Labels (PAPL) describes how to print extra pick control labels for a specified pick control number.

Manually Confirming Shipments (MCON)

Purpose: Use the Confirm Shipments menu option to confirm the shipment of items on pick slips or drop ship pick slips by pick control number or by billing batch number. You might use manual confirmation for international shipments if your PC manifest system does not support them.

Overview: Confirmation is the process of identifying packages or items as shipped and recording essential information for reporting and tracking purposes. There are two methods available to confirm shipments: the manual confirmation function that is used for manual billing and drop ship items, and the PC manifest system.

This topic describes manual confirmation. Manual confirmation provides the opportunity to confirm shipments interactively or by batch. Interactive confirmation is driven by the pick control number, whereas batch confirmation is driven by the billing batch number (with or without exceptions).

Confirming drop ship pick slips: You can also use this menu option to confirm drop ship pick slips, once your drop ship vendor has informed you that the orders have been shipped. You can confirm drop ship pick slips either by billing batch number or by pick control number.

When you process drop ship pick slips using the Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) menu option, the system produces a pick slip/invoice which lists the billing batch number. If you want to confirm by pick control number, you must display picks through standard order inquiry (Select Options/Display picks), and note the pick control number for each order.

Confirming pick slips containing a stored value card item: When you confirm a pick slip containing a stored value card item, the system verifies that the stored value card is assigned a number. If the stored value card is not assigned a number, the system does not allow you to confirm the pick slip or change the status of the pick to carryover and displays an error message: All stored value card numbers must be entered before accepting. You must assign a number to the stored value card before you can confirm the associated pick slip. See Assigning Numbers to Physical Stored Value Cards.

In this topic:

• Interactive Confirmation Screen
• Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen
• Confirm Pick Control Details Screen
• Confirm by Pick Batch Number Screen
• Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions)
• Accepting and Rejecting Batches (with Exceptions)
  • Batch Confirmation Pop-up Window
• Confirming by Billing Batch Number (without Exceptions)
• Batch Confirmed Report
• Drop Ship Batch Confirmation Report

Interactive Confirmation Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to specify the shipping warehouse, current billing date, and whether you are going to confirm shipments by the pick control number or by the billing batch number.

How to display this screen: Enter MCON in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Confirm Shipment from a menu.

Field	Description
Shipping warehouse	A code that represents the warehouse from which you are shipping the merchandise. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Current billing date	The date that you want to confirm this billing run. The current date defaults, but you can override it. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); required.
Bill by batch #	Indicates whether you want to bill by batch or pick control number. Valid values are: Selected = Bill by the batch number assigned by the system when you generated pick slips or drop ship pick slips. Unselected (default) = Bill by the pick control number assigned by the system when you generated pick slips or drop ship pick slips.

Completing this screen: If you selected the Bill by batch number field, you advance to the Confirm by Pick Batch Number Screen. If you left the Bill by batch number field blank, you advance to the Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen.

Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen

Purpose: The system assigns a pick control number to each pick slip. Use this screen to confirm a shipment by the pick control number.

How to display this screen: Complete the Interactive Confirmation Screen without selecting the Bill by batch number field.

Field	Description
Warehouse	A code that represents the shipping warehouse. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Billing date	The date reflects when the order is shipped. The value defaults from the previous screen. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Control # (Pick control number)	Enter the pick control number that you are confirming. Note: You cannot confirm a pick control number that is in a pre-printed status (G Generated No Authorization or H Generated Has Authorization); see Creating Pre-Generated Picks. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
The following fields are displayed when you enter a valid pick control number in an eligible status.
Pick status	The description of the pick slip’s status. Possible statuses are: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.
Order #	The order number you wish to confirm. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only, assigned by the system.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Order # field. Indicates the number of shipping addresses on the order. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship to	The name and address of the customer to receive the order. Alphanumeric, 41 positions (name), 32 positions (address), 10 positions (apartment), 40 positions (city/st/postal/cntry); display-only.
Ship via	A code that represents the shipper. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). The system writes an S (shipment) order transaction history message (Order History in order maintenance and inquiry) if the ship via is changed. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Meter charges	The freight charges associated with shipping this order. The system writes an S (shipment) order transaction history message (Order History in order maintenance and inquiry) if the meter charge is changed. If you enter multiple tracking numbers, the meter charges are associated with the first tracking number entered. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Tracking #	The shipment tracking number, if any, to save in the Manifest Upload Audit table. The number is then eligible to include in the: Outbound Email XML Message (CWEmailOut) or shipment confirmation email Detailed Order Inquiry Response XML Message (CWORDEROUT) For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1). Also, this number is displayed on the: Display Package Information Screen Third Streamlined Order Inquiry Screen (Order Summary) Note: The two screens above can provide a link to the shipper’s web site to review tracking history. Select Orders For Return Authorization Screen Display Order History Screen Multiple tracking numbers? Optionally, you can select Add’l Tracking #s to open the Enter Additional Tracking Numbers window. You can enter up to 10 tracking numbers at this window, plus the tracking number at the Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen, for a maximum of 11 numbers, regardless of the number of pick control labels that were originally generated. Note: Once you confirm shipment as described below, you cannot enter any additional tracking numbers for the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Change the date	Select Change Date to activate the date field. Enter the new date.
Carry over	Select Carry over to change the status of the pick slip to carryover.
Enter additional tracking numbers	Select Add’l Tracking #s to open the Enter Additional Tracking Numbers window. You can enter up to 10 tracking numbers at this window, plus the tracking number at the Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen, for a maximum of 11 numbers, regardless of the number of pick control labels that were originally generated. Note: This option is available only after you have entered a valid pick control number.
Work with details	Select Work with Details to advance to the Confirm Pick Control Details Screen. This option is available only after entering a pick control number.

Instructions: To confirm shipment by pick control number.

1. Enter the pick control number is the one you want to confirm in the Control # (Pick control number) field. The additional fields, described above, are displayed in the bottom portion of the screen.
2. Optionally, change the Ship via.
3. Optionally, enter Meter charges.
4. Optionally, enter a Tracking #. You can also select Add’l Tracking #s to open the Enter Additional Tracking Numbers window, where you can enter up to 10 tracking numbers, for a maximum of 11 numbers, regardless of the number of pick control labels that were originally generated.
5. Select OK to confirm the pick control number. A confirmation window opens if you normally use PC manifesting. Select Accept to accept the confirmation; otherwise, select Reject.
6. When you confirm the shipment, the screen displays a message: Pick submitted to async job!

Note:

When you confirm the shipment, all labels associated with the pick control number are confirmed. You cannot confirm any additional shipments for the pick control number.

For more information: See Updates During Background Processing.

Confirm Pick Control Details Screen

Purpose: This screen allows you to display pick control details at the line level.

How to display this screen: Select Work with details at the Confirm by Pick Control Number Screen.

Field	Description
Control # (Pick control number)	The control number assigned to a pick slip. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pick status (Unlabeled field to the left of the Control number field)	The description of the pick slip's status. Status options: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.
Order #	A unique number to identify an order. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only, assigned by the system.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field to the right of the order number)	The number of the shipping address on the order. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship to	The name of the customer to receive the order. Alphanumeric, 41 positions (name); display-only.
Line #	The line number on the pick slip. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Item	A code that represents a unit of inventory. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	The unique characteristics of an item, such as its color and size. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Printed	The quantity of the item printed on the pick slip. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Packed	The quantity of the item packed and shipping. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Sts (Status)	The status of the item. Valid values are: C = Cancel H = Hold Blank = Open Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.

Confirm by Pick Batch Number Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to confirm an entire batch of picks in a single entry. The system assigns the billing batch number when you generate pick slips.

How to display this screen: Select the Bill by batch number field on the Interactive Confirmation Screen.

Field	Description
Billing batch #	The billing batch number containing the pick slips you are confirming. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Exceptions	Indicates if there are pick slips in the batch that are not shipping at this time. Valid values are: Selected = Exclude exceptions from the billing run. You advance to the Work with Batch Exceptions screen. Unselected = There are no exceptions in the billing run. You advance to the Batch Confirmation pop-up window.
Ship via	The shipper assigned to this batch of pick slips. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. The system writes an S (shipment) order transaction history message (Order History in order maintenance and inquiry) if you enter a ship via in this field. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Meter charge	The total freight charges associated with shipping all pick slips in this batch. The system writes an S (shipment) order transaction history message (Order History in order maintenance and inquiry) if you enter a meter charge in this field. The system uses the following calculation to determine the meter charge for each unit in the batch: meter charge / total units in batch = meter charge per unit The system uses the following calculation to determine the meter charge for each pick slip in the batch: unit meter charge x number of units on pick = meter charge for each pick slip Example: batch 203 includes 25 pick slips the total meter charge for the batch is 150.00 the total units in the batch is 50 units per pick slip is 2 150.00 (meter charge) / 50 (total units in batch) = 3.00 (meter charge per unit) 3.00 (unit meter charge) x 2 (units per pick slip) = 6.00 (meter charge for each pick slip) Example: batch 204 includes 25 pick slips the total meter charge for the batch is 150.00 the total units in the batch is 50 units for pick slips 1-24 is 1 units for pick slip 25 is 26 150.00 (meter charge) / 50 (total units in batch) = 3.00 (meter charge per unit) 3.00 (unit meter charge) x 1 (number of units on pick slip) = 3.00 (meter charge for pick slips 1-24) 3.00 (unit meter charge) x 26 (number of units on pick slip) = 78.00 (meter charge for pick slip 25) You can review summary information for a batch of pick slips such as per unit meter charge and total picks confirmed on the Batch Confirmed Report. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.

Completing this screen: If you selected the Exceptions field, you advance to the Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions).If you unselected the Exceptions field, you advance to the Batch Confirmation pop-up window. See Confirming by Billing Batch Number (without Exceptions).

Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions)

Purpose: Exceptions are pick control numbers in the batch that did not ship or that you wish to exclude from the batch (for example, the pick slip includes a different ship via than the rest of the pick slips in the batch). Use this screen to exclude these control numbers from the billing run.

How to display this screen: Select the Exceptions field on the Confirm by Pick Batch Number Screen.

Field	Description
Billing batch #	A number to identify a batch of pick slips. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only, assigned by the system.
Billing date	The billing date for this batch of picks. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Cntrl # (Pick control number)	The control number assigned to a pick slip. Type a control number to display pick slips in that batch in numeric sequence beginning with your entry. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Ship to	The name of the customer to receive the order. Alphanumeric, 41 positions; display-only.
Pick status	The description of the pick slip's status. Valid values are: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.
Whs (Warehouse)	A code to identify the warehouse confirming the shipment. Warehouse codes are defined in and validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Void the pick	Select Void Pick for a pick slip to advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number).
Confirm the pick	Select Confirm for a pick slip to confirm the pick slip. Note: If the pick is a carryover or was submitted to the PC manifest, its status changes to Open when you select this option.
Carry over	Select Carryover for a pick slip to change the status of the pick to Carryover.
Work with details	Select Work with Details for a pick slip to advance to the Confirm Pick Control Details Screen.
Accept the batch	Select Accept to accept the batch. See Accepting and Rejecting Batches (with Exceptions).
Reject the batch	Select Reject to reject the batch. The system displays the Confirm Reject Request pop-up window. See Accepting and Rejecting Batches (with Exceptions).

Accepting and Rejecting Batches (with Exceptions)

Purpose: To complete confirming by billing batch number (with exceptions), you must accept or reject the batch.

To accept a batch: You can accept a batch by selecting Accept at the Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions). The system displays the Batch Confirmation pop-up window.

Batch Confirmation Pop-up Window

This window indicates that you are about to submit the batch for confirmation. Select OK to accept the batch confirmation and exit the screen; otherwise, select Exit to cancel the batch confirmation and return to the previous screen.

Confirming the batch causes the system to submit the batch job (BCH_CONFRM) for processing, and create the Batch Confirmed Report. Any pick slip that you marked for void or carry over is excluded from the billing run.

To reject a batch: You can reject a batch by selecting Reject at the Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions). The Confirm Delete pop-up window displays.

Select OK to confirm the delete or select Exit to cancel and return to the previous screen.

Important:

If you confirm the rejection, any changes that you indicated on the Work with Batch Exceptions Screen (Confirming by Billing Batch Number with Exceptions) are not executed by the system. Pick slips remain in the status they were in when you entered the Work with Batch Exceptions screen.

Confirming by Billing Batch Number (without Exceptions)

Purpose: Use this window to confirm a batch of pick control numbers for billing without exceptions.

How to display this window: Deselect the Exceptions field at the Confirm by Pick Batch Number Screen.

To confirm the batch: Select OK to confirm at the confirmation window to confirm the batch; otherwise, select Exit to cancel the confirmation and return to the Confirm by Pick Batch Number screen.

Confirming the batch causes the system to return to the previous screen and to submit the batch job (BCH_CONFRM) for processing, and to create the Batch Confirmed Report.

Reprinting and Voiding Pick Slips (WVRP or WSVP)

Purpose: A pick might need to be voided because:

• the original pick was destroyed
• you need to change a shipper
• you found an error on the original pick slip
• the customer cancels the order
• you need to de-allocate or unreserve stock

Options when voiding: Your options include voiding the pick slip and:

• leaving the order line(s) reserved
• unreserving the order line(s)
• automatically reprinting
• putting the order on hold
• canceling the order

Not all options are available through all screens.

Secured features: The ability to reprint and void pick slips through the Void/Reprint Picks (WVRP) menu option is controlled by the Change Pick Slips (A32) and Reprint Pick Slips (A33) secured features; however, these features do not control the Void Pick Batch (WSVP) menu option.

Drop ship pick slip/invoices: You cannot use this menu option to void or reprint a Drop Ship Pick Slip/Invoice. The system deletes a drop ship pick slip/invoice once the associated drop ship purchase order is closed or canceled and all IL Outbound Trigger records (WOIT) for the purchase order and drop ship pick slip/invoice are in an X Closed status.

If an invoice number is assigned: The Generate Invoice Number at Pick Gen (H80) and Generate Invoice # at Pick Gen without Address Match (K81) system control value controls whether to assign a pending invoice number at pick slip generation. If you reprint a pick slip that has a pending invoice number assigned, the system assigns a new pending invoice number for the new pick control number.

Note:

If you are using pick label tracking, you void all labels for a pick slip at once. You cannot void a pick slip if any of its labels have been confirmed.

Pick In API: You can also use the generic Pick In API to void or reprint pick slips. See the Generic Pick In API (Shipments, Voids, and Backorders) in the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).for more information.

Status update to Order Broker? If the Create Separate Picks for Ship for Pickup Orders (L89) system control value is:

• unselected: Voiding a pick slip for a ship-for-pickup, retail pickup, or delivery order does not generate a status update to the Order Broker and neither does reprinting the pick slip. Once you have created the order in the Order Broker by initially generating the pick slip, Order Management System does not send another status update until you confirm shipment or cancel the order.
• selected: Voiding a pick slip for a regular (not special) ship-for-pickup order generates a status update to the Order Broker to cancel the original order in Order Broker, and reprinting the pick slip generates a new order submission to the Order Broker. However, regardless of the Create Separate Picks for Ship for Pickup Orders (L89) system control value, voiding a pick slip for a retail pickup or delivery order does not generate another status update until you confirm shipment or cancel the order.

See Ship-for-Pickup Orders and Retail Pickup (including Ship-for-Pickup) or Delivery Orders for overviews.

Bypassing printable pick slips not available: Even if the Bypass Creation of Pick Forms during WSPS Pick Generation (K55) system control value is selected, voiding and reprinting a pick slip still creates a printable pick slip. This system control value controls the generation of printable pick slips only when you use the Streamlined Pick Slip Generation (WSPS) option.

In this topic:

• Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Selecting Reprint/Void Criteria) (WVRP)
  • Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number)
  • Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen
  • Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen
• Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen
• Reprinting Pick Slips
• Voiding Pick Slips
• Work with Pick Control Detail Screen
  • Pick Control Details Screen (Displaying Pick Control Details)
• Freezing an Item
• Select a New Pick Location Screen
  • Select Item Location Screen

For more information: See Void Pick Batch (WSVP).

Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Selecting Reprint/Void Criteria) (WVRP)

Purpose: Use this screen to enter the information about the pick slip(s) that controls which screen you advance to next. For example, enter:

• Pick control number or range of pick control numbers to advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number).
• Batch number and, optionally, Cart number to advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen.
• Order number and, optionally, the Ship-to number or Order line number to advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen.

How to display this screen: Enter WVRP in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Reprint/Void Pick Slips from a menu.

Field	Description
Pick control # range	Optionally, enter a range of pick control numbers to advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number). Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Batch #	Optionally, enter a batch number to display all pick slips in that billing batch. You advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Cart #	Optionally, enter a cart number if you also entered a Batch #. You advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen, displaying all pick slips in that billing batch and cart. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Order #	Optionally, enter an order number to display all pick slips for that order. You advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen. Numeric, 8 positions; optional.
Order ship to #	Optionally, enter an order ship-to number if you also entered an Order #. You advance to the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen, displaying all pick slips for that order and order ship-to. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number)

Purpose: This screen lists the pick slip information for a specific control number or a range of pick control numbers. You have the option to:

• for all displayed pick slips:
  • void and reprint all
  • void and optionally unreserve all, or leave the order line(s) reserved
• for individual pick slips:
  • work with pick control details
  • display pick control header information
  • void and leave the order line(s) reserved
  • void and reprint
  • void and unreserve

How to display this screen: At the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Selecting Reprint/Void Criteria) (WVRP), enter a pick control number or range of pick control numbers.

Field	Description
Selected control # (Selected control number range)	The control number information that you entered at the previous screen. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Fax drop ship picks	Indicates whether you want to fax drop ship picks to the vendor. This option is not currently implemented.
Control # (Pick control number)	A number to identify a pick slip. Enter a pick control number to display existing pick control numbers, beginning with your entry. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Batch # (Billing batch number)	A number to identify a batch of pick slips. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Cart #	A number to identify the batch pick slip list assigned to a cart. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Order #	A unique number to identify an order. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only, assigned by the system.
Printed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was printed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Confirmed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was confirmed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Status	The status of the pick slip. Valid values are: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Work with pick control details	Select Work with for a pick control number to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Void pick slips	Select Void for a pick control number to void the pick slip. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Display pick control header information	Select Display for a pick control number to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Reprint pick slips	Select Reprint for a pick control number to reprint the pick slip. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void/unreserve pick slips	Select Void/Unreserve to void the pick slip and unreserve the items. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Reprint all pick slips	Select Reprint All to reprint all pick slips. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void all pick slips	Select Void All to void all pick slips. See Voiding Pick Slips.

Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen

Purpose: This screen lists the pick slip information for a specific batch number and cart number. You have the option to:

• for all displayed pick slips:
  • void and reprint all
  • void and optionally unreserve all, or leave the order line(s) reserved
• for individual pick slips:
  • work with pick control details
  • display pick control header information
  • void and leave the order line(s) reserved
  • void and reprint
  • void and unreserve

How to display this screen: At the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Selecting Reprint/Void Criteria) (WVRP), enter a Batch number and Cart number (or leave this field blank to select all cart numbers).

Field	Description
Selected batch #	The batch number that is carried over from the previous screen. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Cart #	A number that represents the batch pick slip list that is assigned to each cart. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Control # (Pick control number)	The pick control number. Enter a cart/control number to display pick slips beginning with the control number you entered. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Shp # (Ship-to number)	The number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number one. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Printed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was printed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Confirmed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was confirmed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Status	The status of the pick slip. Valid values are: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Work with pick control details	Select Work with for a pick slip to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Void pick slips	Select Void for a pick control number to void the pick slip. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Display pick control header information	Select Display for a pick slip to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Reprint pick slips	Select Reprint for a pick slip to reprint the pick slip. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void/unreserve pick slips	Select Void/Unreserve to void the pick slip and unreserve the items. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Reprint all pick slips	Select Reprint All to reprint all pick slips. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void all pick slips	Select Void All to void all pick slips. See Voiding Pick Slips.

Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with, display, reprint, or void pick slips for a specific order number, order Ship-to number and order line number. You have the option to:

• for all displayed pick slips:
  • void and reprint all
  • void all and put the order(s) on hold
  • void all and cancel the order(s)
• for individual pick slips:
  • work with pick control details
  • display pick control header information
  • void and leave the order line(s) reserved
  • void and reprint
  • void and unreserve

How to display this screen:

• At the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Selecting Reprint/Void Criteria) (WVRP), enter an Order number, Order Ship-to number (or leave this field blank to select all ship-to numbers) and order line number (or leave this field blank to select all line numbers).
• Select Void/Reprint at the Picks Pending Window in order maintenance. This window opens in order maintenance when you attempt to cancel an order that has printed pick slips.

Field	Description
Ship # (Ship to number)	Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Control # (Pick control number)	Indicates the pick control numbers that you want to reprint or void pick slips for. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Batch # (Billing batch number)	A number that is assigned to each pick slip run. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Cart #	A number that represents the batch pick slip list that is assigned to each cart. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Printed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was printed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Confirmed (date/time)	The date and time that the pick slip was confirmed. Date: numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Status	The status of the pick slip. Valid values are: Open Submitted to async Billing pending Confirmed Declined authorization Async processing error Manifest submission CarryOver Packed Reprinted Suspended Void Waiting for authorization Authorized Display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Work with pick control details	Select Work with for a pick slip to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Void pick slips	Select Void for a pick slip to void the pick slip. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Display pick control header information	Select Display for a pick slip to advance to the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.
Reprint pick slips	Select Reprint for a pick slip to reprint the pick slip. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void/unreserve pick slips	Select Void/Unreserve to void the pick slip and unreserve the items. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Reprint all pick slips	Select Reprint All to reprint all pick slips. See Reprinting Pick Slips.
Void all pick slips and hold the order(s).	Select Void All/Hold Order to void all pick slips and hold the order(s). This option is available only if pick slips exist. See Voiding Pick Slips.
Void all pick slips and cancel the order(s).	Select Void All/Cancel Order. The system voids all pick slips and cancels the order(s). The system displays a pop-up window to confirm the cancellation. This option is available only if pick slips exist. See Voiding Pick Slips.

Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review pick information including the control and billing batch numbers, pick status, generation type, date/time for last update, confirmation, printing, assigned to number of labels, cartons, zones, warehouse, and drop points.

How to display this screen: Select Display for a pick slip at any Reprint/Void Pick Slips screen or at the Display Pick Tickets for Order Screen.

Additional pick control header information: Select OK to advance to the Second Display Pick Control Header Screen.

For more information: See Displaying Pick Slip Generation Inquiry (DPSI) for more information on this screen and the additional screens available.

Reprinting Pick Slips

Purpose: Use the Reprint Pick Slips function to void the original pick slip and reprint another pick slip. You might want to use this feature if the quantity listed on the pick slip cannot be picked for one reason or another, or if the original pick slip was destroyed somehow.

The system automatically voids the original pick slip and reprints the pick slip with a new number. If the Generate Invoice Number at Pick Gen (H80) or Generate Invoice # at Pick Gen without Address Match (K81) system control value was selected, and an invoice number was assigned at pick slip generation, the system also assigns a new invoice number at this time. However, the system does not evaluate the order and customer to see if they meet the criteria that govern invoice number assignment at pick slip generation; a new invoice number is assigned only if there was already an invoice number in the table.

Note:

This option does not automatically reprint the Gift Acknowledgement for a gift order. See the Automatic Generation of Gift Acknowledgement (B92) system control value for more information.

How to reprint a single pick slip: Select Reprint for a pick slip at any Reprint/Void Pick Slip screen.

Error messages:

The system displays an error message similar to the following when you select Reprint for a pick slip that is in a billing pending status:

Pick cannot by voided/reprinted/changed in this status.

The system displays an error message similar to the following if a user is currently maintaining this pick slip:

Pick Control # 9999 is in use by user KLETENDRE.

How to reprint all pick slips: You can reprint all pick slips by selecting Reprint All at any Reprint/Void Pick Slip screen. The system reprints all the picks in the batch, except pick slips that are in a billing pending status.

Authorization error: The screen displays an error message similar to the following when you select Reprint All to reprint all pick slips if the Access to Void/Reprint All (A76) secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE:

User Not Authorized to Function.

=

When this secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE, the system still allows you to select Reprint for a specific pick slip in order to reprint it.

Sorting pick slips into separate PDF files:

• If you select the Reprint option for a pick slip, the system creates a separate pick slip PDF document based on warehouse, ship via priority, the Split Special Handling Picks (L44) system control value, and the PICKS_IN_SPOOL_FILE property in Working with Customer Properties (PROP).
• If you select the Reprint All option, the system does not create a separate pick slip PDF document based on warehouse, ship via priority, or the Split Special Handling Picks (L44) system control value. The system will create a separate pick slip PDF document based only on the PICKS_IN_SPOOL_FILE property in Working with Customer Properties (PROP).

See Sorting Pick Slips into Separate PDF Documents for more information.

Voiding Pick Slips

Purpose: The Void Pick Slips function in Reprinting and Voiding Pick Slips (WVRP or WSVP) enables you to void the original pick slip, which is similar to ripping up the pick slip. The system automatically voids the original pick slip and decreases the quantity printed.

You can also use the Void Pick Batch (WSVP) menu option to void an entire batch of pick slips if, for example, they were generated by mistake. This menu option simply voids the pick slips in the batch, without the option to reprint or unreserve the order lines or to hold or cancel the order.

Which pick statuses are eligible? Voiding a pick slip or a group of pick slips through any of the options available through Reprinting and Voiding Pick Slips (WVRP or WSVP) is possible only for pick slips that are not in a G Generated No Authorization, H Generated Has Authorization, A Submitted to Async or B Billing Pending status. The Void Pick Batch (WSVP) option also omits pick slips in these statuses, as well as those in C Confirmed and V Void statuses.

OROB unavailable error: The screen displays an error message such as Cannot void pick - OROB unavailable if:

• the order is a regular (not special) ship-for-pickup order, and
• the Create Separate Picks for Ship for Pickup Orders (L89) system control value is selected, and
• the system cannot communicate with Order Broker (for instance, the Order Broker application is not currently running)

This error message occurs because, in this situation, the system needs to send a cancellation status update when you void a pick slip. See Ship-for-Pickup Orders for background.

Updates at void: When you void a pick slip, the system updates the following tables based on the quantity on the voided pick slip:

• Item Location: subtracts the printed quantity
• Reserved Order Line: subtracts the printed quantity and updates the quantity remaining
• Order Detail: subtracts the printed quantity

It deletes the related records in the following tables:

• Pick Control Header
• Pick Control Detail
• Pick Control Header Extended
• Pick Control Label
• Pick Location

Pick slip preparation: When you void a pick slip, the system removes any pick slip preparation from the order and then reevaluates the order for pick slip preparation; see Preparing Orders for Pick Slip Generation.

Credit card payments: If the pick slip is associated with a credit card payment, it creates a record in the Void Auths table for the amount on the voided pick slip.

Order transaction history: The system writes an Order Transaction History message indicating that the pick slip was voided.

Pick download trigger: If the Create Generic Pick Download Triggers (I31) system control value is selected, the system also creates a PCH trigger record to generate a void request through the Generic Pick Out API.

For more information see the Web Services Guide on My Oracle Support (ID 2149144.1).

Tickler: If the Use Workflow Management (H96) system control value is selected, the system creates a VP tickler when you void pick slips subject to the criteria you have set up for the tickler event; however, voiding a batch of pick slips through the Void Pick Batch (WSVP) menu option does not create ticklers.

Notify Order Broker: If the order is a regular (not special) ship-for-pickup order, and the Create Separate Picks for Ship for Pickup Orders (L89) system control value is selected, the system sends a cancellation status update to the Order Broker. See Ship-for-Pickup Orders for an overview.

Void and Unreserve a Single Pick Slip

Select Void/Unreserve for a pick slip record at any Reprint/Void Pick Slip screen.

Error message: The system displays an error message similar to the following if you select Void/Unreserve a pick slip that is in a billing pending status:

Pick cannot be voided/reprinted/changed in this status.

Note:

If you void a pick slip and all of the other pick slips for that order are in a billing pending status, the system automatically submits the picks to Billing.

See Voiding Pick Slips for information on the Cannot void pick - OROB unavailable error message.

Partial void? If you void a pick slip for a partial shipment on an order when one or more items is not available, the system tracks the amount of the void in the Void Auths table. Then, when the item is available and you generate a new pick slip, it will not be necessary to obtain a new authorization.

Void All Pick Slips (With or Without Unreserving)

Select Void All at the Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number) or the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen.

Error messages:

The screen displays an error message similar to the following when you select Void All to void all pick slips if a pick slip is in a billing pending status and other pick slips for that order still exist:

Pick 2146 is in Billing Hold status. Void not processed.

The system voids all of the pick slips listed on the screen except those pick slips in a billing pending status. However, if you select Void All to void all pick slips and any of the other pick slips for that order are in a billing pending status, the system automatically submits the picks to Billing.

The screen displays an error message similar to the following when you select Void All to reprint all pick slips if the Access to Void/Reprint All (A76) secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE:

User Not Authorized to Function.

When this secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE, the system still allows you to select Void/Unreserve a specific pick slip in order to void it.

See Voiding Pick Slips for information on the Cannot void pick - OROB unavailable error message.

Void All Pick Slips and Hold Order

At the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen, you can void all lines on the pick slip and hold the order by selecting Void All/Hold Order.

The system changes the status on the pick slip to Void and changes the order status to Hold, using a system hold reason of VD (Pick was Voided).

Error messages:

The screen displays an error message similar to the following if you select Void All/Hold Order if a pick slip is in a billing pending status and other pick slips for that order still exist:

Pick 2146 is in Billing Hold status. Void not processed.

See Voiding Pick Slips for information on the Cannot void pick - OROB unavailable error message.

The system voids all of the pick slips displayed on the screen except those pick slips in a billing pending status. However, if you select Void All/Hold Order to void all pick slips and all of the other pick slips for that order are in a billing pending status, the system automatically submits the picks to Billing.

The screen displays an error message similar to the following when you select Void All/Hold Order to void and hold all lines on the pick slip if the Access to Void/Reprint All (A76) secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE:

User Not Authorized to Function.

Void All Pick Slips and Cancel Order

At the Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen, you can void all lines on the pick slip and cancel the order by selecting Void All/Cancel Order.

Void/cancel process: You advance through a series of windows to void and cancel an order:

• Confirm Void window: Click OK to continue with the void/cancel, or click Exit if you do not want to void the pick slip and cancel the order.
• Confirm Unreserve window:
  • If you are canceling the order, your actions at this window do not affect the outcome. You can click OK or Exit to continue; otherwise,
  • To void the pick slip and unreserve the order lines but not cancel the order, select the Unreserve field; otherwise, leave the Unreserve field unselected to void the pick slip and leave the order line(s) reserved; then, click OK.
• Enter Cancel Reason window: To void the pick slips without canceling the order, do not enter a Cancel reason and click Exit; otherwise:
  • Enter a Cancel reason to proceed with canceling the order.
  • If there are multiple ship-to’s on the order, use the Cancel all ship to’s field to indicate whether to cancel just the first ship-to; otherwise, this selection does not matter.
  • Select the Recalculate frt field to refund freight to the customer; otherwise, leave it unselected.
  • Click OK when you are done.
• If the order includes unbilled membership items: You might proceed through additional windows related to membership cancellations if there are any unbilled membership items on the order. This situation can occur only if your pick slip generation criteria excluded membership items, since otherwise the membership item would have billed at the time you generated the pick slips. See Canceling a Membership Item for more information on the membership item cancellation process and related windows.

Note:

You cannot complete the cancellation of an order through the Void/Cancel option for a retail pickup or delivery order if you do not have authority under the Cancel Order Broker Lines (B19) secured feature. In this situation, the system voids the pick slip but does not cancel the order.

Once you complete the above series of windows, the system changes the status on the pick slip to Void and changes the order status to Canceled.

In addition, if a stored value card payment with an open, unused authorization amount exists on the order, the system generates a stored value card authorization reversal; see Stored Value Card Authorization Reversal.

Error messages:

The system displays an error message similar to the following if you select Void All/Cancel Order and a pick slip is in a billing pending status:

Pick Control # 2070 cannot be voided.

The system voids all of the pick slips displayed on the screen except those picks slips in a billing pending status. If you select Void All/Cancel Order and all of the other pick slips for that pick generation run are in a billing pending status, the system automatically submits the picks to Billing.

The screen displays the following error message if you select Void All/Cancel Order to void and cancel all lines on the pick slip and the Access to Void/Reprint All (A76) secured feature is set to *EXCLUDE:

User Not Authorized to Function.

See Voiding Pick Slips for information on the Cannot void pick - OROB unavailable error message.

Work with Pick Control Detail Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to cancel an order detail line, display the Pick Control Detail screen, freeze an item on the order detail line, override locations, display the Work With Order screen, and accept or reject your entries.

How to display this screen: Select Work with for a pick slip at Reprint/Void Pick Slips Screen (Reprinting/Voiding by Pick Control Number), Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Batch Screen, or Reprint/Void Pick Slips by Order Screen.

Error messages: When you select Work with for a pick slip:

The system displays an error message similar to the following when you select Work with for a pick slip that is in a billing pending status:

Pick cannot by voided/reprinted/changed in this status.

The system displays an error message similar to the following if a user is currently maintaining this pick slip:

Pick Control # 9999 is in use by user KLETENDRE.

Field	Description
Control # (Pick control number)	The control number assigned to a batch of picks. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Billing batch # (Billing batch number)	A system-generated batch number that is assigned to each pick slip run. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Order #	A unique number assigned by the system to identify an order. Every order on the system is assigned an order number. Numeric, 8 positions; display-only.
Ship-to number (Unlabeled field)	A hyphen (-) separates this field from the Order # field. Indicates the number of shipping addresses for the order. The system assigns a sequential ship-to number to every order. The first ship-to address is assigned the number one. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship to name (Ship to name and address)	The name and address of the customer who placed the order. Validated against the Customer Sold-to table. Alphanumeric, 41 positions (name), 32 positions (address), 10 positions (apartment), 40 positions (city/st/postal/country); display-only.
Ship via	A code that represents the carrier for this order. Validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Line #	Indicates the line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Enter a line number to display records starting with the number you entered. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item	A code that represents a unit of inventory. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	A code that further defines the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Description	The description of the item/SKU. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Print (Printed)	The number of units of the item printed and the quantity which should be shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Alloc (Allocated)	The number of units of the item allocated and the quantity which should be shipped. This number can be decreased, but never increased. Note: If you decrease the allocated quantity and the pick slip is associated with a credit card payment, the system creates a record in the Void Auths table for the amount placed on backorder. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Packd (Packed)	The number of units of the item packed and the quantity which is being shipped. Not currently implemented. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Display an order detail line	Select Display for a detail line to advance to the Pick Control Details Screen (Displaying Pick Control Details).
Freeze an item	Select Freeze Item for a detail line to freeze an item.
Override a location	Select Override Location for a detail line to display the Select a New Pick Location Screen.
Accept the pick control details	Select Accept.
Reject the pick control details	Select Reject.

Pick Control Details Screen (Displaying Pick Control Details)

Purpose: Use this screen to review the pick slip, including the control and line number, the item/SKU and description, the original printed quantity, the actual quantity printed, and the override quantity, if applicable.

How to display this screen: Select Display for a detail line at the Work with Pick Control Detail Screen.

Field	Description
Control # (Pick control number)	The number that you are viewing pick control details for. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line #	Indicates the line number on the order. Up to 999 detail lines can be entered on an order. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Item/SKU	The unit of inventory that you are viewing pick control details for. Alphanumeric, 12 positions (item), three 4-position fields (SKU); display-only.
Description	The description of the item/SKU that you are viewing pick control details for. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Original qty printed	The original quantity that was printed on the pick. This becomes important if the quantity on the pick is changed. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Qty printed	The number of units of the item printed and the quantity which should be shipped. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Override qty	The number of units that supersede the original quantity. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Freezing an Item

Purpose: You freeze an item or SKU in a location to prevent picks slips from printing. For example, you might choose to freeze an item/SKU that has been damaged while in the warehouse so that it will not ship to a customer.

If you select the Reservation freeze flag in the Item Location table, the system does not generate pick slips. However, all other inventory transaction are allowed.

How to freeze an item: Select Freeze Item for an item on the Work with Pick Control Detail Screen.

Results: A batch program runs in the background and flags the item as frozen in the Item Location table.

Select a New Pick Location Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to override the location for picking an order detail line.

How to display this screen: Select Override Location for an item at the Display Pick Control Header (1 of 2) Screen.

Field	Description
Control # (Pick control number)	The number that you are viewing pick control details for. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Line #	Indicates the line number that you are viewing pick control details for. Up to 999 detail lines may be entered on an order. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
W/H (Warehouse)	The warehouse code. Validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Location	A code that represents an area within the warehouse that contains the item/SKU. Typically the location code is composed of a single alphanumeric character for Zone, and two numbers each for Aisle, Shelf, and Bin. For instance, the location A010201 indicates: Zone Aisle Shelf Bin A 01 02 01 Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Quantity	The quantity allocated to this pick slip from the warehouse location. You can enter a quantity at this field . Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select a location	Select Select Loc to advance to the Select Item Location Screen.

Select Item Location Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select a new location for this pick control detail.

How to display this screen: Select Select Loc at the Select a New Pick Location Screen.

Field	Description
Item	A code that represents a unit of inventory. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	A code that further defines the item. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Whs (Warehouse)	The code for this warehouse. Validated against the Warehouse table. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Location	A code that represents an area within the warehouse that contains the item/SKU. Typically the location code is composed of a single alphanumeric character for Zone, and two numbers each for Aisle, Shelf, and Bin. For instance, the location A010201 indicates: Zone: A Aisle: 01 Shelf: 02 Bin: 01 You can enter a different location at this field. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; optional.
Location	Displays the location code that you want to pick from. Alphanumeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Pickable	Selected = Indicates that inventory can be picked from the location. Unselected = Indicates that inventory cannot be picked from the location.
Zone	Identifies the warehouse zone where the location is situated. Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.
Aisle	Identifies the warehouse aisle of the location. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Shelf	Identifies the location's shelf number within the aisle. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Bin #	Identifies the location's bin number on the shelf. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Freeze (Freeze flag)	Indicates whether the item location or SKU location is frozen. Valid values are: Selected = The item/SKU location is frozen. Unselected = The item/SKU location is not frozen. If a location is frozen, Pick Slip Generation does not print picks. See Performing Pick Slip Generation. Note: Even though a pick slip does not print for an item from a frozen item location, the system still reserves the item on the Order Lines Fields in Order Entry.
Available	The number of items that are available at this location. Alphanumeric, 1 position; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select the item location	Select Select Request for a location to return to the Select a New Pick Location Screen. The system automatically enters any information that you entered at the Select Item Location Screen.

Void Pick Batch (WSVP)

Purpose: Use this option to void a batch of picks without unreserving, canceling, reprinting, or holding the related orders or order lines. You might use this option when you have printed a batch of pick slips incorrectly and need to reprint them.

Void Pick Batch Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSVP in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Void Pick Batch from a menu.

Completing this screen: Enter the 7-position billing batch number in the Billing batch # field and select Void Batch.

Note:

You cannot use this screen to void pick slips if pick slip generation is currently active. Instead, the screen displays an error: Pick Slip Generation is active.

Updates: See Voiding Pick Slips for information on the updates performed when you void a batch of pick slips.

Printing the Fill Rate Reports (PFRR)

Purpose: Use the fill rate, shipment summary, and backorder summary reports to quickly evaluate your stock status for fulfilling orders. These reports help you identify how much you have to handle each order before the order is completely shipped.

What these reports can help you determine is if you are able to ship an order completely immediately or if there are typically lines backordered on the majority of your orders. If so, you have to make more than one shipment on the order -- which costs you money and customer satisfaction.

The information on these reports might indicate that you have a problem with your purchasing department or your vendors, because you don't have enough stock on-hand to fulfill your orders.

In this topic:

• Submit Fill Rate Reports Screen
• Fill Rate Report
• Shipment Summary Report
• Backorder Summary Report

Submit Fill Rate Reports Screen

How to display this screen: Enter PFRR in the Fast path field at the top of any menu screen or select the Print Fill Rate Reports option from the menu.

You can attach this option to the CONFIRM menu (which you use to confirm and bill orders for shipment) or to a periodic process, such as on the NIGHTLY menu, so you can keep on top of your order fulfillment status.

At this screen, you may specify the offer you want to run the report for, the date range for the report, and which report(s) you want to print.

Field	Description
Offer	Enter the code for the catalog, space or television advertisement you want to report on. The report will reflect the backorder/fulfillment status for this offer only. Offer codes are defined in and validated against the Offer table; see Working with Offers (WOFR). You must specify an offer or a date range for this report. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Date range	The dates through which you want to report on your backorder/fulfillment status. This date range is associated with the effective dates for the offer, as defined in the Offer date range fields in the Offer table. Only offers effective during this date range will be included on these reports. You must specify an offer or a date range for this report. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); optional.
Reports to print	Use this area of the screen to select which reports you want to print. Choices are: Fill Rate Report, which gives you a view of your in stock rate for fulfilling orders. Shipment Summary Report, which shows the number and percentage of single and multiple shipments. Backorder Summary Report, which ages single and multiple shipments on your orders, using predefined aging buckets. Valid values are: Selected = (Default): Run the report. Unselected = Do not run the report.

Printing the Manifest Audit Report (PMAR)

Purpose: Use the Manifest Audit report to help you determine the shipment status of packages you have sent to the PC manifesting station. The system writes an audit record each time you receive an upload from the PC manifest or confirm a pick slip by pick control number in Manual Confirmation. The Print Manifest Audit Report menu option allows you to choose the format and other selection criteria for printing a report of manifest audit records.

Periodic function: You can also print this report as part of your periodic processing, using a periodic function with the Program name of PRF0027. To do so:

• Select Accept Save Dflt at the Manifest Audit Report screen to save your default settings; the settings saved by this option are those that control:
  • which version(s) of the report to generate
  • whether to include unconfirmed (unbilled) uploads only
• When you execute the periodic process, enter the date you want to include in the report in the Job date field. You can select only one date at a time using this method; however, reports that are sorted on the scan date will select different records than the report sorted on the billing batch date if the package was not scanned on the same date the pick slip was generated.

See Working with Periodic Processes (WPPR) for more information on working with periodic processes.

In this topic:

• Manifest Audit Report Screen
• Manifest Audit Report
• Sorted by Scan Date/Order Number
• Sorted by Batch Date

Manifest Audit Report Screen

How to display this screen: Enter PMAR in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Print Manifest Audit Report from a menu.

Field	Description
...by scan date/order #	Indicates whether to print the report sorted by scan date (when the package was wanded at the manifest station), then order number. Valid values are: Selected = Print by scan date/order number. Unselected = Do not print by scan date/order number. Initially defaults to selected, but you can change the default by selecting Accept Save Dflt at this screen.
...by scan date/cntl #	Indicates whether to print the report sorted by scan date, then pick control number. Valid values are: Selected = Print by scan date/pick control number. Unselected = Do not print by scan date/pick control number. Initially defaults to selected, but you can change the default by selecting Accept Save Dflt at this screen.
...by batch date	Indicates whether to print the report sorted by billing batch date (when the pick slips were generated), then pick control number. Valid values are: Selected = Print by billing batch date. Unselected = Do not print by billing batch date. Initially defaults to selected, but you can change the default by selecting Accept Save Dflt at this screen.
Date from...	The starting and ending date of the time range you want to include in the report. Leave both fields blank to include all dates. When you print the report sorted by scan date, records scanned on the dates you enter appear on the report. When you print the report sorted by billing batch number, records whose billing batches were created on that date appear on the report. Numeric, two fields, 6 positions each field (in user date format); optional.
Billing batch #	The billing batch number you want to include on the report. Leave this field blank to include all billing batches. Numeric, 7 positions; optional.
Unconfirmed uploads only	Determines whether to include only records that have not yet been billed on the report. Valid values are: Selected = Include only unbilled audit records. Unselected = Include all appropriate audit records regardless of whether they have been billed. Initially defaults to blank, but you can change the default by selecting Accept Save Dflt at this screen.

Instructions:

1. Optionally, change the settings in each of the first three fields to indicate which versions of the report to print. You must select at least one version of the report.
2. Optionally, enter a range of dates to include in the report. The system checks the primary sort of the report to determine which records to include when you enter a range of dates. For example, a record could have a billing batch date of 12/15 and a scan date of 12/16. If your range of dates ends with 12/15, the record would be selected for the report sorted by billing batch number, but not for the report(s) sorted by scan date.
3. Optionally, enter a billing batch number or reset the Unconfirmed uploads only flag.
4. Select OK. The system validates your entries and highlights any fields you need to correct. Correct any fields and select OK again.
5. Select Accept Save Dflt to submit the reports and save your settings in each selected/unselected field. The next time you select this menu option or run a periodic process that generates the Manifest Audit Report, the system will use these settings. To submit the reports without saving your settings, select Accept.

The system displays a message indicating that it has submitted the job MAN_AUDIT, and generates the Manifest Audit Report.

Note:

When you generate the Manifest Audit Report as part of a periodic process, the system submits the job MANIFEST, and creates the reports.

Printing Additional Pick Labels (PAPL)

Purpose: Use Print Additional Pick Labels to print extra pick control labels for a specific pick control number. The system uses the print program name defined in the Pick Label Print Program (F28) system control value to determine the format of the pick control labels. The base pick label print program name is PICKLBL, indicating you print labels on a standard printer. With this setting, the label includes the ship-to name and address, and a print file is available at the Forms Management screen.

In order to print extra pick control labels:

• The Pick Label Print Program (F28) system control value must contain a print program name. An error message indicates if the system control value is blank: Valid value required in SCV F28.
• The # of Pick Control Labels (D47) system control value must contain a value greater than or equal to 1.
• The selected pick control number must be in a Manifest Submission status.
• You must be using a PC manifesting station that supports multiple label tracking.

Print Additional Pick Labels Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to select the pick control number and specify the amount of extra labels to print.

How to display this screen: Enter PAPL in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Print Additional Pick Labels from a menu.

Field	Description
Pick control #	The control number assigned to the pick slip for which you wish to print extra labels. An error message similar to the following indicates if you enter an invalid number: Pick control # 1495 is invalid. An error message similar to the following indicates if you enter a pick control number that is not in a Manifest Submission status: Invalid Pick Status for Pick Control # 1469. Numeric, 7 positions; required.
Number of addl labels (Number of additional labels)	The number of extra labels to print. An error message similar to the following indicates if you do not enter a number in this field: # of Labels must be GE 1. The maximum number of pick control labels that you can print for a specific pick control number is 99. The system adds the amount of pick control labels already printed to the number you enter in this field. An error message similar to the following indicates if you enter an amount that will exceed 99 labels: Existing labels 48 with Add'l Labels 56 exceeds 99. Numeric, 3 positions; required.

When you complete this screen to print additional pick control labels, the system:

• generates the PDF file if the Pick Label Print Program (F28) system control value is set to PICKLBL.
• updates the Labels field in the Pick Control Header table.
• creates a PC Manifest Download record in the PC Manifest Download New file (FLMNDL).
• creates a record in the Pick Control Label table.

Setting Up the Fulfillment Tables

Topics in this part:

• Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA) describes creating, changing, deleting, and displaying shipper records. Additionally, you will find displaying ship via history; working with, creating, changing, and deleting shipper items; and working with SCF ship via values.
• Working with SCF Codes (WSCF) describes creating Sectional Center Facility (SCF) codes.
• Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) explains how to create, change, delete, and display these codes.
• Working with Shipping Rates (WSHR) includes creating, changing, deleting, and displaying shipping rates.
• Working with Drop Points (WDPT) describes creating, changing, deleting, and displaying these codes.
• Editing Warehouse Drop Points (EWDP) describes creating, changing, and deleting warehouse drop point information.
• Editing SCF Ship Via (ESSV) describes how to create, change, or delete multiple SCF/ship via values quickly.
• Working with Dunnage Weight (WDUN) describes creating dunnage weights based on the cube of the items on a pick slip, and changing and deleting dunnage weights.
• Working with Zip/Ship Via (WZSV) describes how to cross-reference default shippers for specific destinations based on zip code; this allows you to assign carriers automatically.
• Working with Tax Jurisdiction (WTXJ) describes how to create and work with special tax jurisdiction areas, defined by zip code.
• Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB) describes how to create and work with freight tables for the Freight by Order Weight freight method defined for a source code.
• Working with Offer Ship Via Assignment (WSVA) describes how to create and work with ship via overrides based on offer or source code, order or merchandise dollar total, and geographical area.
• Working with Lines of Business (WLOB) describes how to create and work with line of business codes and assignments and explains how the system assigns a line of business to an order.
• Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ) describes the statistics on the Display Line of Business Order Queue Summary screen and explains how the system updates the information on this screen.
• Creating SCF Ship Vias by SCF Range (MSSV) describes how to create SCF ship via information for a selected SCF range, rather then entering this information for each SCF or drop point.
• Load USPS Zip Code File (LZPS) describes how to upload current postal code information from a CD provided by the U.S. Postal Service.

Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA)

Purpose: Ship via codes represent the carrier or service that delivers merchandise from you to your customers.

Each order must be assigned a valid shipper code in Order Entry.

In this topic:

• Ship Via Defaults
• Ship Via Override Hierarchy
• Work with Ship Via Screen
• Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen
• Create Ship Via (2 of 2) Screen
• Display Ship Via History Screen
• Work with Ship Via/Item Screen
  • Create Ship Via/Item Screen
• Working with Best Way Ship Vias
  • Best Way Ship Via Pop-up Window
• Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen
  • Create Ship Via Indicia Screen (Entering the Carrier's Indicia Information)
• Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges)
  • Create Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Service Charge Dollar Chart)
• Work with Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen
  • Create Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen (Order Weight Charges)

Ship Via Defaults

The ship via code defaults in Order Entry, based on:

• a default ship via defined in the Default Ship Via (A77) system control value or at the Default Values for Orders screen.
• a preferred ship via, based on the SCF (first three positions of the destination postal code) to which the order is shipping.
• a ship via code defined for an item.

Order Broker orders: If you receive retail pickup or delivery orders from the Order Broker, you also need to define the Order Broker Ship Via (K94) to use if the fulfillment response message from Order Broker does not specify a ship via. See Order Broker Integration for a discussion.

Ship Via Override Hierarchy

There are several ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper. This table displays the ship via overrides that can apply to an order in the hierarchy in which the overrides apply. For example, the Promotion override is listed first, indicating that it overrides any other ship via substitution on an order.

Ship Via Overrides

Table	Results
Ship via overrides at the order header level
Promotion	If an order, or shipping address on an order, qualifies for a promotion with a ship via override, the system changes the ship via on the order header when you select Accept or select Add Recipient to accept the order. This is the last ship via substitution that the system makes during order entry, and it overrides any previous ship via substitutions. See Working with Promotions (WPRO) for more information on defining a ship via override for a promotion.
Default Van Delivery Ship Via	If the order qualifies for van delivery, the system defaults the ship via defined in the Default Van Delivery Ship Via (L07) system control value to the order header. See Determining if an Order Qualifies for Van Delivery for an overview.
Zip/Ship Via	If the ship via on the order header allows auto-assignment of carrier (the ship via’s Allow auto assignment field is selected) and a default ship via is defined for the postal code on the order, the system changes the ship via for the ship to customer to the default ship via for the postal code. See Working with Zip/Ship Via (WZSV).
Offer Ship Via	If an order, or shipping address on an order, qualifies for an offer ship via override, the system changes the ship via on the order header when you select Accept or Add Recipient to accept the order. See Working with Offer Ship Via Assignment (WSVA).
Preferred Ship Via for SCF	If you define a Preferred ship via or the SCF and the Allow auto assignment field for this ship via is selected, the system changes the Ship via on the order header to the preferred ship via. See Working with SCF Codes (WSCF).
Best Way Ship Via	If you select a best way ship via from the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, or the system assigns a best way ship via automatically, it changes the ship via on the order header to the best way ship via. See Working with Best Way Ship Vias.
Default Ship Via	If a ship via is defined in the Default Ship Via (A77) system control value, the system assigns this ship via to the order by default.
Ship via overrides at the order line level	These ship via overrides do not apply to the order header.
Item Ship Via Override	Item ship via overrides define the shippers that are eligible to ship an item to its destination. If you define item ship via overrides for an item, the system verifies that the ship via on the order header is an eligible shipper for each item on the order whose Ship via field is blank. If the shipper on the order header is not valid for an item on an order line, the system displays the Ship Via Overrides for Item Window, requiring you to select an eligible shipper for the item. The ship via you select is assigned to the item on the order line, however, the system does not override the ship via on the order header. See Working with Item Ship Via Overrides.
Item	If you define a ship via code in the Ship via field for an item, the system defaults this ship via code to the order line.

Work with Ship Via Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete, or display ship vias. This screen also provides access to the Ship Via History table where the system captures life-to-date and current information for packages delivered and freight collected, summarized by year and period.

How to display this screen: Enter WVIA in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Ship Via from a menu.

Field	Description
Code	A code that represents the shipper. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Description	The description associated with the ship via code. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a ship via code	Select Create. See Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen and Create Ship Via (2 of 2) Screen.
Change a ship via code	Select Change for a shipper to advance to the Change Ship Via screen. At this screen you can change any information except the shipper code. See Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a ship via code	Select Delete for a shipper to delete it. If a record of this ship via exists anywhere on the system, an error message indicates that you have a record of the ship via in another table; for example, in the SCF/Ship Via table. Note: You cannot delete a ship via code if it is used on an order.
Display a ship via code	Select Display for a shipper to advance to the Display Ship Via screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen and Create Ship Via (2 of 2) Screen for field descriptions.
Display ship via history	Select History for a shipper to advance to the Display Ship Via History Screen.
Work with shipper item charges	Select Item Charges for a shipper to advance to the Work with Ship Via/Item Screen.
Define alternate shippers for a ship via	Select Best Way for a shipper to advance to the Best Way Ship Via Pop-up Window. See Working with Best Way Ship Vias for a discussion.
Identify the distribution center (warehouse or drop point) in order to calculate shipping charges	Select Indicia for a shipper to advance to the Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen.
Define service charges for a ship via	Select Service Charges for a shipper to advance to the Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges).
Define weight charges for a ship via	Select Weight Charges for a shipper to advance to the Work with Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen.
Work with user fields for a ship via	Select User Field for a shipper. See Work with User Fields Screen.
Work with SCF Ship Via codes	Select W/W SCF Ship Via. See Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV).

Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen

Purpose: Use the Create Ship Via screens to create a ship via code.

Select OK at this screen to advance to the Create Ship Via (2 of 2) Screen, where you can enter additional ship via code information.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Ship Via Screen, select Create to display the first Create Ship Via screen.

Field	Description
Ship via	A code for the shipper that delivers merchandise to the customer, such as 01 for UPS. You can use any value from 01 to 98. Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Ship via description	The description associated with the ship via code, such as United Parcel Service, Parcel Post, Federal Express, etc. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Type	A code that identifies the type of shipper for this ship via code. This information is used during pick slip generation to sort all similar shippers together. Additionally, the system validates that, for example, you specify whether an address is a business or a residence, which is required for UPS (U) shippers. Depending on the pick slip printing program you use, you can customize the format and information that prints for certain types of ship vias. Valid values are: DHL Federal Express Parcel Post Parcel Post Class 1 Parcel Post Class 2 Parcel Post Class 3 Parcel Post Class 4 UPS Note: Tracking shipment history through live links at the Display Package Information Screen is supported only for Federal Express, UPS, and Parcel Post (not Parcel Post Class 1, 2, 3, or 4) ship via types. Optional.
Freight percent	Used in the Percentage/Ship Via freight method. With this freight method, the merchandise amount on the order is multiplied by the percentage in the Freight percent field in the Ship Via record to calculate shipping charges. The calculated freight charge cannot be less than/greater than the value in the Freight (min/max) field. The system uses the freight fee in the Frt min field of the Ship Via record if the result of the freight calculation is less than the minimum freight fee. Otherwise, the system uses the freight fee in the Frt max field of the Ship Via record if the result of the freight calculation is greater than the maximum freight fee. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Priority (Ship via priority)	Controls how the system allocates inventory to backorders or reserves inventory during Batch Reservation. Valid values range from 0 to 9, where: 0 = Lowest priority 9 = Highest priority The Immediate Reservation program that reserves inventory during Order Entry does not use the priority defined at the ship via level or the source code level. Numeric, 1 position; required.
Carrier	A short description of the ship via. This code prints on pick slips and reports. Example: UPSB (for “UPS Blue”) Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Billing	This code indicates how orders being delivered by this shipper are processed and billed. This code only applies to the ship via on the name and address screen of Order Entry (known as the “Order Header” screen). Valid values are: Regular = Indicates that orders for this shipper are processed through “regular” processing which produces pick slips after reservation and must be confirmed (manifested) or billed manually. Express = orders for this shipper bypass reservation, confirmation, and pick slip generation and are billed immediately after the order is accepted. For example, an express ship via code may be used to record the sale of a mis-shipped item. When an express bill ship via is used in Order Entry, a pop-up window appears where you may indicate whether inventory should be reduced and identify the warehouse and location from which the item was taken. Optional.
Freight (min/max)	These two fields identify the minimum and maximum freight charge for this ship via when using the Percentage/Ship Via freight method. This method multiplies the merchandise amount of the order by the percentage in the Freight percent field in the ship via record. The system uses the value in the Freight min field as the freight charge if the calculated freight charge is less than this value. The system uses the value in the Freight max field as the freight charge if the calculated freight charge is greater than this value. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Use delivery codes	Indicates whether this shipper charges freight based on rate tables. For example, UPS charges different rates when shipping to someone's home or office. Valid values are: Selected = the system uses a rate table to calculate shipping charges for this shipper Unselected = the system does not use a rate table to calculate shipping charges for this shipper
PO box delivery	Indicates whether this shipper delivers to post office (P.O.) boxes. Any address that includes P.O. Box or APO/FPO must be delivered to a post office box. Valid values are: Selected = the shipper delivers to post office boxes. You can enter P.O. Box or APO/FPO information in the Street field during Order Entry. Unselected = the shipper does not deliver to post office boxes. The system displays a message during Order Entry that the shipper cannot deliver to a P.O. box.
Add'l freight only	Indicates whether the freight fee defined in the Add'l freight charge field is used as the shipping charge for orders delivered by this shipper. Valid values are: Selected = The system applies the Add'l freight charge field as the shipping charge to the order if the merchandise amount is less than or equal to the amount in the $ limit field. The system does not calculate freight for the order based on the freight method defined for the source code on the order header. Unselected = The system calculates freight for the order based on the freight method defined for the source code on the order header. In addition, the system applies the Add’l freight charge to the order if the merchandise amount is less than or equal to the amount in the $ limit field.
Add'l freight charge	An additional charge for packages delivered by this shipper. For example, you may add additional freight charges for express delivery services such as UPS Next Day or Federal Express. If the Add’l freight only field is selected, the system uses the additional freight charge as the shipping charge on the order; no other freight charges are applied to the order. If the Add’l freight only field is unselected, the system adds the additional freight charge to the order in addition to the freight calculated for the order based on the freight method defined for the source code on the order header. If the merchandise amount on the order is greater than the amount in the $ limit field, the system does not add the Add’l freight charge to the order, regardless of the setting of the Add’l freight only field. During Order Entry, the Freight+ field is calculated and updated with the Add'l freight charges value only if the ship via for which you have defined additional charges is on the order header. The additional freight charges are included in the Charges field at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for the purposes of allowing the customer to select a best way shipper in order entry. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
$ limit	The merchandise dollar amount required to add the additional freight charge to the order. If the merchandise dollar amount is equal to or below this value, the system adds the additional freight charge to the order. If the merchandise dollar amount is greater than this value, the system does not add the additional freight charge to the order. Alphanumeric, 1 position; required if you define an add’l freight charge.
Allow auto assignment	Indicates whether the system can change the shipper on an order if there is a Ship via defined for the destination postal code in the Zip/Ship Via table, or if there is a Preferred ship via defined for the SCF code. Valid values are: Selected = the system checks the Zip/Ship Via table and the SCF table when you accept a new order (using Accept or Accept/Add Rcp.) and changes the shipper code if a default shipper is found for the postal code to which the order is shipping. Note: This process occurs only if you are using the Order Recap screen, as specified by the Display Order Recap (A75) system control value. Unselected = (default) the shipper code will not be changed.
Maximum carton weight	Defines the carton weight for the system to use when calculating freight using the Freight by order weight freight method. See Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB) for more information on setting up freight tables and using this method. Note: The system does not use this value in any other calculation or validation. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Exempt duty charges	Indicates whether the system should add duty charges to orders this shipper delivers, or whether the shipper is exempt. Valid values are: selected = Do not add duty charges to orders this shipper delivers. unselected = Add duty charges to orders for this shipper where applicable. The system determines whether to add duty charges to an order by comparing an item's harmonize code with the harmonize codes defined for a country's duty rates. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY).
Telephone #	The phone number for this ship via. You can define a telephone number format to map to the phone numbers operators enter into the system. The system defaults the telephone number formats for the country defined in the Default Country for Customer Address (B17) system control value for any phone number entered on this screen. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 14 positions; optional.
Download to e-commerce	Indicates whether to make the shipper available to customers on the web storefront. Valid values are: Selected = Download ship via code to the web storefront. Unselected = Do not download ship via code to the web storefront. When you deselect this field, the SCF/Ship Via download program does not download the SCF/Ship Via record since the ship via is not valid for the web storefront. See Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV). In order to update the web storefront with ship via changes, you must download the static tables again. See Systems Operation Downloading E-Commerce Static Tables (ESTF).

Create Ship Via (2 of 2) Screen

How to display this screen: Select OK at the Create Ship Via (1 of 2) Screen to display the second Create Ship Via screen.

Field	Description
Alternate ship via 1	A code for the shipper to use in place of the primary shipper, if the values in the # of days since 1st shipment field or the# of shipments are met. Example: If the primary shipper is an overnight carrier and the order includes backordered items, you may want to ship the backordered items by an alternate shipper to save on shipping charges. The system uses this ship via code for all items on the order during pick slip generation and displays a message in Order Information. The ship via code entered here is defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
# of days since 1st shipment	The number of days since the first shipment after which the Alternate ship via 1 will be used. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
# of shipments	The number of shipments after which the Alternate ship via 1 will be used. Example: If the primary shipper is an overnight shipper and there have been 2 shipments on the order, you may switch to an alternate shipper to save shipping charges. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Alternate ship via 2	The shipper to use in place of the primary shipper if the weight or dollar value of the carton is less than the value in the Minimum weight or Minimum value fields. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Minimum weight	The minimum weight of a package to be delivered by the primary shipper; if the package weighs less than this minimum, alternate shipper 2 is used instead. Note: The system uses the item’s Ship wgt. (Shipping weight) to evaluate minimum weight. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Minimum value	The minimum dollar value of a carton being delivered by the shipper defined in the Alternate ship via 2 field. If the value of items in the carton is low, you may want to send the shipment by a uninsured carrier. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Alternate ship via 3	This code represents a shipper to use in place of the primary shipper, if the weight or dollar value of the carton is greater than the value in the Maximum weight or Maximum value fields. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Maximum weight	The maximum weight of a carton being delivered by the shipper defined in the Alternate ship via 3 field. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Maximum value	The maximum dollar value of a carton being delivered by the shipper defined in the Alternate ship via 3 field. If the value of the carton is high, you may want to send the shipment by an insured carrier. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Decision Manager Service Level	Informational field to identify the service level assigned to the ship via. If you are using CyberSource Decision Manager Fraud Scoring, Order Management System maps the Service Level for the ship via to the shipTo ShippingMethod in the CyberSource Authorization Request (ccAuthService) XML Message. Service levels defined in CyberSource Decision Manager are: sameday: Courier or same day service. oneday: Next day or overnight service. twoday: Two day service. threeday: Three day service. lowcost: Lowest cost service pickup: Store pickup other: Other shipping method. none: No shipping method because product is a service or subscription. When a ShippingMethod is defined for a ship to in the ccAuthService message, the shipping address is not automatically added to the Decision Manager negative list. You can add a shipping address to the negative list using the Transaction Marking Tool; see Marking Order Data During Order Review in the Case Management section of the Decision Manager User Guide. Note: To use a custom value, create a Decision Manager custom rule with the shipping method order element. Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
ChannelAdvisor carrier	Together with the Channel Advisor Service Class, serves as a cross reference to the carrier passed through ChannelAdvisor. See ChannelAdvisor Integration Overview and ChannelAdvisor Setup for background. Alphanumeric, 60 positions; optional.
ChannelAdvisor Service Class	Together with the ChannelAdvisor Carrier, serves as a cross reference to the carrier passed through ChannelAdvisor. See ChannelAdvisor Integration Overview and ChannelAdvisor Setup for background. Alphanumeric, 60 positions; optional.
Narvar Carrier Name	The name identifying the carrier to Narvar. Passed to Narvar as the carrier. If not populated with a valid carrier line, OTHER is passed to Narvar, as the carrier and tracking number links do not work correctly. The list of valid carrier names and service codes are provided by Narvar. See Narvar Integration for background. Case-insensitive. Alphanumeric, 60 positions; optional.
Narvar Carrier Service Code	The service code identifying the carrier’s level of service to Narvar. Passed to Narvar as the carrier_service. Optional for the Narvar shipment notification. The list of valid carrier names and service codes are provided by Narvar. See Narvar Integration for background. Case-insensitive. Alphanumeric, 60 positions; optional.

Display Ship Via History Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review historical and current information for this shipper. Billing updates this information and sequences it by period, within the year.

How to display this screen:

• At the Work with Ship Via Screen, select History for a ship via code.
• At the Change Ship Via screen or Display Ship Via screen, select Ship Via History.

Field	Description
Ship via	The code and description for the shipper. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Packages (to date)	The number of packages delivered by this shipper life-to-date. The Billing program updates this field. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Freight collected (Freight collected to date)	The estimated dollar amount charged to date by the shipper to deliver the packages, not including additional freight charges. The Billing program increases this value for sales and decreases this value for returns whose Refund freight is selected. Numeric, 11 positions with 2-place decimal; display-only.
Packages (today)	The number of packages delivered by this shipper today. The Billing program updates this value with the number of picks produced and the associated shipping charges. This number is not updated if the transaction is a return or exchange. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Freight collected (Freight collected today)	The estimated dollar amount charged today by the shipper to deliver the package, not including additional freight charges. The Billing program increases this value for sales and decreases this value for returns whose Refund freight is selected. Numeric, 11 positions with 2-place decimal; display-only.
Year	The last two digits of the year associated with the accounting period. Enter a year to display history for that year. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Period	The accounting period within the specified year. Typically, accounting periods equate to months. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Packages	The number of packages delivered by this ship via during the specified year and/or period. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Freight collected (Freight collected for year, period)	The estimated dollar amount charged for the year and period by the shipper for deliveries, not including additional freight charges. The Billing program increases this value for sales and decreases this value for returns whose Refund freight is selected. Numeric, 11 positions with 2-place decimal; display-only.

Work with Ship Via/Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to define an extra freight charge for shipping a particular item by this shipper. For example, you may want to charge an extra $20.00 for shipping a piece of furniture. The additional shipper/item freight charge is included in the Freight + field in Order Entry, and listed as the Add’l frt charge for the order detail line in order inquiry.

Note:

The shipper/item charges are included in the Charges field at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for the purposes of allowing the customer to select a best way shipper in order entry.

How to display this screen: From the Work with Ship Via Screen, select Item Charges for a ship via code.

Field	Description
Item	The code for an item you sell. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; optional.
Extra charge	The extra charge that is added to orders for this item. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new shipper/item	Select Create to advance to the Create Ship Via/Item Screen.
Change shipper/items	Select Change for an item to advance to the Change Ship Via/Item screen. At this screen you can change any information except the item number. See Create Ship Via/Item Screen for field descriptions.
Delete shipper/items	Select Delete for an item to delete it.

Create Ship Via/Item Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a shipper/item charge.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Ship Via/Item Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Ship via	The shipper that delivers the order to the customer. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. Note: If this ship via is entered in the Ship via field for the item record, the ship via will default on the order line in order entry, and the shipper/item charge will be added to the order, regardless of whether this is the ship via defined on the order header. See Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM). Numeric, 2 positions; display only.
Item	The code for an item you sell. Item codes are defined in and validated against the Item table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Extra charge	The extra charge that is added to orders for shipping this item. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.

Working with Best Way Ship Vias

Purpose: Use the Best Way Ship Via table to define alternate shippers for a particular ship via to use the best way shipping feature.

Best way shipping in order entry can either display a window enabling the order entry operator to offer a choice of shipment options to the customer, or have the system automatically select the ship via with the lowest overall shipping charges.

If you display the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window, the customer can select a less expensive shipper, or choose a shipper who can deliver the order sooner. The window lists each of the alternate shippers identified with a Type of O in the Best Way Ship Via table. The operator can select a different shipper for the order, or accept the current ship via. To have the system automatically apply the best way shipper with the lowest charges, you use the Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67) system control value. In this situation, the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window does not open automatically in order entry, and the ship via assignment takes place “behind the scenes.”

What factors affect the freight charges? While the freight method specified for the source code on the order header controls the basic freight charges on an order, there are other factors that can make one ship via more or less expensive than another, including:

• Add'l freight charge
• shipper/item charges (see Work with Ship Via/Item Screen)
• service charges (see Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges))
• weight charges (see Work with Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen)
• handling charges (if the Include Special Handling in Alternate Shipping Charges by Via (I03) system control value is selected)

Additionally, based on the information displayed at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window, a customer can select a shipper that is not the least expensive, but offers a quicker delivery date.

Preventing the customer’s selection from being overridden: If you are using best way shipping in order entry, you should set up the shipper so that no subsequent ship via overrides will take place. Additional ship via overrides include:

• freight promotions (see Working with Promotions (WPRO))
• item ship via overrides (see Working with Item Ship Via Overrides)
• default ship via defined for item

Also, you can leave the Allow auto assignment field to unselected to prevent the following ship via overrides from taking place:

• zip/ship via default (see Working with Zip/Ship Via (WZSV))
• a Preferred ship via for the SCF (see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF))

See Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence.

Related system control values: Use the following system control values to control the function of the best way shipping window in order entry:

• Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67)
• Display Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in OM (I02)
• Include Special Handling in Alternate Shipping Charges by Via (I03)
• Use Business Days When Calculating Expected Delivery Date (K38)
• Warehouse Cutoff Time (K39)

Summary of best way shipping types: The ways in which best way shipping at order entry vary are summarized in the following table:

	In Order Entry (with Pop-up Window)	In Order Entry (Automatic)
Purpose:	The Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry lets you offer the customer the option to select a ship via based on freight charges or expected delivery date.	The system automatically selects the best way ship via with the lowest overall shipping charges
Shippers identified by:	Type = O
Additional required setup:	Leave the Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67) system control value unselected Optionally: use the Display Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in OM (I02), Include Special Handling in Alternate Shipping Charges by Via (I03), Use Business Days When Calculating Expected Delivery Date (K38), and Warehouse Cutoff Time (K39) system control values leave the Allow auto assignment field to unselected	Select the Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67) system control value; see that system control value for additional setup requirements

Best Way Ship Via Pop-up Window

How to display this window: Select Best Way for a ship via code at the Work with Ship Via Screen.

Field	Description
Best way ship via	The code for the alternate shipper you want to evaluate for best way shipping. Note: In order to add a best way ship via to an order, it needs to have a valid SCF/ship via records for the shipping address. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Type	The type of best way shipping. Valid values are: O = order entry: You can select the best way shipper at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry to provide the customer a choice of shippers for the order, or have the system automatically select the best way shipper with the lowest overall charges if the Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67) system control value is selected. See above for more information. P = pick slip: This value is not currently implemented. Alphanumeric, 1 position; required.

Adding a best way ship via: Complete the Via and Type field and click OK to add a new alternate shipper for the primary ship via. Your entry “drops down” to the list of best way shippers.

To delete: Select Delete for a shipper to remove it as a best way shipper.

To display: Select Display Ship Via for a shipper to advance to the Display Ship Via History Screen.

Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen

Indicia messages are messages you enter to print on the pick slip, such as shipping instructions or notes to the carrier. The indicia message that displays is determined by the drop point associated with the ship via for an order. The drop point associated with the ship via for an order depends on whether or not you are using the Zone skipping feature in Pick Slip Generation.

Drop points represent locations to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse. Typically, a drop point represents the address of a UPS facility. This drop point prints as the return address on the pick slip and is the destination to which undeliverable packages are returned.

You must specify drop points for shipping in two ways: you set up a drop point for each warehouse when you enter warehouse information using Work with Warehouses (see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS)); the system uses this drop point in Pick Slip generation if you are not using the Zone skipping feature, or you can optionally specify drop points for each warehouse, ship via, and SCF combination using the Editing Warehouse Drop Points (EWDP) menu option; the system uses the drop points you specify in this menu option when you select the Zone skipping feature in Pick Slip Generation.

Setting up indicia messages: Each drop point/ship via combination for a pick slip identifies a unique indicia message. You set up indicia messages for each ship via/drop point combination using the Work with Ship Via menu option. Each ship via can have multiple indicia messages, one message for each drop point.

Zone skipping is a method of reducing freight charges by shipping inventory via one carrier to a central drop point, where it is picked up by another carrier and delivered to its final destination. For example, if you are shipping from a Massachusetts warehouse to destinations in California, you might use one carrier to deliver all packages to a UPS center in California, from which they will be shipped to their California destinations. Whether or not you are using zone skipping determines which table the system uses to identify the drop point.

The following table explains which indicia message prints on the pick slip.

For more information:

• About Zones
• Performing Pick Slip Generation
• Working with Drop Points (WDPT)
• Editing Warehouse Drop Points (EWDP)

How to display this screen: Select Indicia for a ship via code on the Work with Ship Via Screen.

Field	Description
Drop point	A code that identifies a location to which you ship packages. Drop points are used with the Zone Skipping feature. This feature enables you to ship a package by one carrier to a designated drop point, at which point another carrier picks up the package and delivers it to its final destination. With this method, the ultimate shipper crosses fewer zones. As a result, you reduce shipping charges because the charge is based on the number of zones crossed within the country. Drop point codes are defined in and validated against the Drop Point table; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	The description associated with the indicia code. Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.
Number	The indicia code for the drop point, as defined by the carrier. Alphanumeric, 20 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Enter the carrier's code for a drop point	Select Create to advance to the Create Ship Via Indicia Screen (Entering the Carrier's Indicia Information).
Delete the carrier's code for a drop point	Select Delete for a record to advance to delete it.
Display the carrier's code for a drop point	Select Display for a record to advance to the Display Ship Via Indicia screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See the Create Ship Via Indicia Screen (Entering the Carrier's Indicia Information) for field descriptions.

Create Ship Via Indicia Screen (Entering the Carrier's Indicia Information)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a ship via indicia.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen, select Create

Field	Description
Ship via	The code for a shipper. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Drop point	A code that identifies a location where you ship an item by one carrier and to be picked up by another carrier and shipped to its final destination. This is known as zone skipping. With this method, you reduce the number of zones crossed. As a result, you reduce the shipping charges. Drop point codes are defined in and validated against the Drop Point table; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Indicia description	The description of the indicia code, as defined by the carrier. Alphanumeric, three lines of 20 positions each. First line required; remaining lines optional.
Indicia number	The carrier's own code for the drop point specified. Alphanumeric, 20 positions; required.

Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges)

Purpose: Use this screen to establish a chart for service charges to add to orders that use this shipper. The system bases the amount of the service charge on the merchandise total of the order, and calculates the service charge for each shipping address on the order. If the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) system control value is selected, the system also includes handling in the order total subject to service charges.

Note:

If the order uses the By Offer Price freight method, the system calculates the total merchandise value by adding the extended single-unit offer price for each item/SKU, disregarding any discounts, associate pricing, price overrides, quantity break pricing, etc. This merchandise value is used for both the freight and the ship via service charges.

Included in freight total: The system adds service charges by ship via to the Freight bucket on the order, and in general treats service charges the same way as freight, for example:

• overriding freight in Order Entry by selecting Charges also overrides service charges
• unselecting the Calculate freight field also prevents the system from calculating service charges

Note:

The service charges are included in the Charges field at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for the purposes of allowing the customer to select a best way shipper in order entry.

Source code requirements: To use service charges by ship via on an order, you must have the following defined for in Working with Source Codes (WSRC):

• the Exclude service charges field unselected
• an order level freight method:
  • $ Chart by Ofr = Freight by dollar chart/offer
  • $ Chart by Src = Freight by dollar chart/source
  • % Source = Freight by source code percentage
  • % Ship Via = Freight by ship via percentage
  • Recipient = Freight by recipient
  • Flat Rt/Ship To = Flat rate by ship-to
  • Order Weight = Freight by order weight
  • By Offer Price = Freight by offer price

How to display this screen: Select Service Charges for a ship via at the Work with Ship Via Screen.

Field	Description
Ship via	A code for the shipper. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Description (Unlabeled field to the right of the ship via)	The name of the shipper. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Dollar amount	The merchandise total of the order required to add this service charge to the order. The system will also include handling in the total subject to service charges if the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) Control value is selected. The system adds the service charge dollar amount or percentage to orders whose totals are at least this amount, but less than the next larger dollar amount you have defined. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Service charge	The amount of service charge to add to an order for the associated dollar amount. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Pct (Percentage)	The percentage to use when calculating the service charge to add to an order for the associated dollar amount. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Maximum charge	The maximum service charge to add to an order. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a service charge	Select Create to advance to the Create Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Service Charge Dollar Chart).
Change a service charge	Select Change for a service charge record to advance to the Change Dollar Chart by Ship Via screen. You can change any information except the dollar amount. See Create Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Service Charge Dollar Chart) for field descriptions.
Delete a service charge	Select Delete for a service charge record to delete it. You can delete a service charge dollar chart record even if the charge has been added to orders.
Display a service charge	Select Display for a service charge record to advance to the Display Dollar Chart by Ship Via screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Service Charge Dollar Chart) for field descriptions.

Create Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Service Charge Dollar Chart)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a service charge by dollar chart record. Each record defines the amount or percentage service charge to add to an order whose merchandise total is at least as large as the dollar amount, but not as large as the next higher dollar amount on the chart. See Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges) for more information on how the system applies service charges to orders.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Dollar Chart by Ship Via Screen (Ship Via Service Charges).

Field	Description
Ship via	The code representing a shipper. Numeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Description (Unlabeled field to the right of the ship via code)	The name of the shipper. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Dollar amount	The required amount of the order subject to the service charge. The system adds the service charge amount or calculates the service charge percentage to orders whose merchandise totals are at least this dollar amount, but less than the next higher dollar amount defined in the dollar chart. The system will also include handling in the total subject to service charges if the Include Handling in Freight Charge Calculation (D77) field in the System Control table is selected. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Service charge	The total service charge to add to an order for this dollar amount. You must define either a service charge dollar amount here, or a service charge percentage, but not both. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if not entering a service charge percentage.
Service charge % (Service charge percentage)	The percentage to use for calculating the service charge to add to an order. The system bases the percentage on the dollar amount subject to freight on the order (generally the merchandise amount; see the Dollar amount field description above). Example: If the service charge percentage for a dollar amount of $100.00 is 5.00, and the dollar amount on the order is also $100.00, the system adds a $5.00 service charge to the order (5% of 100). Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; required if not entering a service charge amount.
Maximum charge	The maximum service charge to add to an order. Typically, you would define a maximum for the highest record on your dollar chart. Example: If the highest dollar amount were $200.00 with a service charge percentage of 4%, you might define a maximum charge of $10.00. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Work with Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a chart for weight charges to add to orders that use this shipper. The system bases the amount of the weight charge on the total weight of the merchandise on the order, and calculates the weight charge for each shipping address on the order.

Determining the order weight: The system uses the weight defined in the Sell weight field for each item on the order to determine the order weight. For example, if the first item on the order weighed 2 pounds and the second item on the order weighed 6 pounds, the order weight would be 8 pounds. The system adds the weight of items for each ship to customer separately.

Determining the weight charge: Once the system determines the weight of the items on the order, the system looks at the order weight charge table set up for the ship via defined for the order ship to. The system finds the order weight defined in the order weight charge table that is at least this order weight, but less than the next larger order weight you have defined.

Included in freight total: The system adds weight charges by ship via to the Freight bucket on the order, and treats the weight charges the same way as freight, for example:

• overriding freight in order entry by selecting Charges also overrides weight charges
• unselecting the Calculate freight field also prevents the system from calculating weight charges

Note:

The weight charges are included in the Charges field at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for the purposes of allowing the customer to select a best way shipper in order entry.

Source code requirements: To use weight charges by ship via on an order, you must have an order level freight method defined for the source code. Order level freight methods are:

• $ Chart by Ofr = Freight by dollar chart/offer
• $ Chart by Src = Freight by dollar chart/source
• % Source = Freight by source code percentage
• % Ship Via = Freight by ship via percentage
• Recipient = Freight by recipient
• Flat Rt/Ship To = Flat rate by ship-to
• Order Weight = Freight by order weight
• By Offer Price = Freight by offer price

See Working with Source Codes (WSRC), for more information on order level freight methods.

Example:

You enter an order with 2 ship-to customers. Ship-to customer 1 uses ship via 3, and ship-to customer 2 uses ship via 4. The order weight for ship-to customer 1 is 9 lbs. and the order weight for ship to customer 2 is 13 lbs.

Ship Via 3 Weight Charges Table		Ship Via 4 Weight Charges Table
Order Weight	Weight Charge	Order Weight	Weight Charge
5 lbs.	0.50	5 lbs.	1.00
10 lbs.	1.00	10 lbs.	2.00
15 lbs.	1.50	15 lbs.	3.00

Results:

Order #	Ship to #	Ship Via	Order Weight	Weight Charge	Freight Charges	Order Ship To Freight
3557	1	3	9 lbs.	.50	1.00	1.50
3557	2	4	13 lbs.	2.00	1.50	3.50

How to display this screen: On the Work with Ship Via Screen, select Weight Charges for a ship via code.

Field	Description
Ship via	The code and description of the shipper you selected on the Work with Ship Via Screen. This is the shipper for which you wish to add a charge to an order based on the weight of the merchandise. Ship via code: Numeric, 2 positions; display-only. Ship via description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Order weight	The total weight to the items on the order. The system looks at the Sell weight field for an item to determine the item's weight. The system adds the weight charge to orders whose order weight is at least this weight, but less than the next larger order weight you have defined. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
Weight charge	The charge you apply to the order based on the weight of the items on the order. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create an order weight charge	Select Create to advance to the Create Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen (Order Weight Charges).
Change an order weight charge	Select Change for an order weight charge to advance to the Change Weight Charges by Ship Via screen. At this screen you can change the Weight charge field. See Create Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen (Order Weight Charges) for a description of the fields on this screen.
Delete an order weight charge	Select Delete for an order weight charge to delete it.
Display an order weight charge	Select Display for an order weight charge to advance to the Display Weight Charges by Ship Via screen. You cannot make any changes on this screen. See Create Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen (Order Weight Charges) for field descriptions.

Create Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen (Order Weight Charges)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a weight charge you can add to an order based on the weight of the items on the order.

How to display this screen: On the Work with Weight Charges by Ship Via Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Ship via	The code and description of the shipper for which you are creating an order weight charge. Ship via code: Numeric, 2 positions; display-only. Ship via description: Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Order weight	The weight of all of the items on the order. The system chooses the order weight in the table that is at least the order weight, but less than the next larger order weight defined. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Weight charge	The charge you wish to add to the order based on the order weight. The 13 adds the order weight charge to the Freight field on the order. Numeric, 8 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.

Working with SCF Codes (WSCF)

Sectional Center Facility (SCF) codes represent the first 3 digits of the destination postal (zip) code. The Work with SCF function allows you to enter information specific to the SCF, including the valid states, the preferred method of shipping to this area, and a warehouse list which defines a hierarchy for reserving merchandise in warehouses.

Shipping address validation: The system uses the SCF table to validate that the customer’s postal code and state are consistent. For example, if you set up an SCF of 011 for the state of MA, but no other states, the system prevents you from entering a customer address with a postal code that starts with 011, but a state of CT. This validation occurs in order entry, customer maintenance, and other functions where you enter name and address information. However, there are a few functions where this validation does not occur, including Working with Customer Fraud Tables (WCFD), Working with Vendors (WVEN) (except for working with vendor FOB), and Working with Companies (WCMP).

Note:

SCF validation occurs only if the customer’s address include a postal code and state. These fields are optional if the Require postal code? or Require state? flags for the country are unselected.

Tax information: An important function of the SCF Tax Rate table, accessible through the Work with SCF function, is to define the tax rate that applies to orders shipped to this SCF. For Canadian SCFs, you can define GST and/or PST rates, and a calculation method.

You can also define tax information at the postal code level. See Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) for more information and flow charts depicting the tax hierarchy.

The steps in which the system determines a customer's tax rate vary, depending on the setting of the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control value:

• unselected = The system first checks the VAT % defined for the country where the order is being shipped. If there is no rate defined for the country, the system checks the rate for the postal code. If there is no postal code tax information, the system checks the SCF Tax Rate table.
• selected = If the state is exempt from VAT, the system checks the postal code rate first. If there is no tax information for the postal code, the system checks the SCF Tax Rate table. If the order is subject to VAT, tax-inclusive prices are used on the order and a hidden tax is included in the order line detail.

You can also define tax exemptions or exceptions for certain items in particular states in the United States, or in Canadian provinces. See Working with Item Tax Exemptions (WITX) and Working with GST Tax Exemption Status (MGTX). Additionally, a customer can be tax- or VAT-exempt; see Working with Customer Tax Status. Also, you can exempt special handling from tax by setting the S/H exclude tax? field for the additional charge code; see Establishing Additional Charge Codes (WADC).

Geographic zone information: The SCF table can be used to identify the geographic zone of a shipping address. Geographic zones are used to divide the country into shipping regions for the purpose of restricting the shipment of weather-sensitive inventory such as plant stock. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview.

The SCF information you enter through this menu option is unique to a particular company, unlike the information in the Zip/City/State table. Information entered through Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) applies to all companies on your system; information entered through Work with SCF Codes applies only to the company for which it is set up.

If the postal code is optional for a country: If the Require postal code? flag for a country is unselected, it is not necessary to specify a postal or zip code for a customer address; however, if the country has the Perform ship via edit? flag selected, the system still needs to validate the SCF/ship via combination for an order. See If the Postal Code is Optional for a Country for a discussion, and see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY) for more information about the address validation settings available for countries.

In this topic:

• Work with SCF Codes Screen
  • Create SCF Screen
• Work with SCF Tax Rates Screen (Change Mode)

Work with SCF Codes Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSCF in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with SCF Codes from a menu.

Field	Description
Country	A code for the country associated with this SCF. Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
SCF (Sectional Center Facility)	A code that represents the first 3 digits of a postal code. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
State # 1	The primary state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
State # 2	The second state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
State # 3	The third state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
State # 4	The fourth state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
State # 5	The fifth state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Warehouse list	The warehouse list to use for orders to this SCF. If the Ship Complete from 1 Warehouse (B16) system control value is selected, the system searches warehouses in the sequence specified in the list for inventory to fulfill an order. You can set up warehouse lists to make fulfillment more efficient and save on shipping costs. See Working with Warehouse Lists (WWHL) for an explanation of warehouse list logic. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Ship via	The preferred ship via for this SCF. The system changes the ship via on the order header to this ship via unless another override takes precedence; however, the Allow auto assignment flag for the ship via controls whether this automatic assignment takes place. See Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Geographic zone	A code representing a region of the country. Geographic zones are used to divide the country into shipping regions for the purpose of restricting the shipment of weather-sensitive inventory such as plant stock. Geographic zones are used in conjunction with zone reservation codes, assigned to items or SKUs, to control item reservation in order entry. Zone reservation coded items/SKUs are not reserved during order entry; instead they are reserved during pick generation, at an optimal time for shipping. Zone reservation logic requires: The item/SKU must be assigned a zone reservation code The offer associated with the order must be assigned a season code The shipping address for the order must be assigned to a geographic zone, using either the postal zip code of the ship to address, or the SCF code of the ship to address. For each zone reservation code, you must define zone date windows for all geographic zones in the country See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Store tax code	The cross-reference to the corresponding tax code in a point-of-sale system. This field is available only if the Default Location for ORCE Integration (K69) system control value is populated. Alphanumeric, 8 positions; optional.

.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new SCF code	Select Create to advance to the Create SCF Screen.
Change an SCF code	Select Change for an SCF code to advance to the Change SCF screen. At the Change screen you can change any information except the SCF code. See Create SCF Screen for field descriptions.
Delete an SCF code	Select Delete for an SCF code to delete it.
Display an SCF code	Select Display for an SCF code to advance to the Display SCF screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create SCF Screen for field descriptions.
Work with tax rates	Select Work with tax rates for an SCF to advance to the Work with SCF Tax Rates Screen (Change Mode).

Create SCF Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create an SCF code.

How to display this screen: At the Work with SCF Codes Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Country code	A code for the country associated with this SCF code. Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
SCF	The first 3 digits of the destination postal code. Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Valid state 1	The primary state or province associated with this SCF. If you are defining an SCF for a country that does not require state or province codes, you can enter ** in this field. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.
Valid state 2	The second state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Valid state 3	The third state or province associated with this SCF. Note: The system does not validate that your entries for the first and second states are different from the third, fourth and fifth states. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Valid state 4	The fourth state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Valid state 5	The fifth state or province associated with this SCF. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Preferred ship via	A code that represents a carrier for an order, such as UPS or USPS. This Ship Via defaults in Order Entry if the ship-to address on the order is for this SCF and a default ship via has not been defined on the Default Values for Orders screen. This default may be overridden by another ship via override; however, the preferred ship via for the SCF does not override the current ship via on the order if the current ship via’s Allow auto assignment field is unselected. See Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Warehouse list	A code that represents a warehouse list used to specify the sequence in which reservation warehouses should be searched for inventory, based on the SCF where the order will be shipped. The system refers to the warehouse list during Batch and Immediate Reservation and when evaluating backorders if the Ship Complete from 1 Warehouse (B16) system control value is selected. If this system control value is unselected, the system first reserves stock from the primary warehouse in the item table, and, if there is not enough available stock in the item’s primary warehouse, reserves stock from the warehouses on the list. See Working with Warehouse Lists (WWHL) for an explanation of the logic the system uses in assigning warehouses from warehouse lists, and for information on defining warehouse lists. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Geographic zone	A code representing a region of the country. Geographic zones are used to divide the country into shipping regions for the purpose of restricting the shipment of weather-sensitive inventory such as plant stock. Geographic zones are used in conjunction with zone reservation codes, assigned to items or SKUs, to control item reservation in order entry. Zone reservation coded items/SKUs are not reserved during order entry; instead they are reserved during pick generation, at an optimal time for shipping. Zone reservation logic requires: The item/SKU must be assigned a zone reservation code The offer associated with the order must be assigned a season code The shipping address for the order must be assigned to a geographic zone, using either the postal ZIP code of the ship to address, or the SCF code of the ship to address. For each zone reservation code, you must define zone date windows for all geographic zones in the country See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Store tax code	The cross-reference to the corresponding tax code in a point-of-sale system. This field is available only if the Default Location for ORCE Integration (K69) system control value is populated. Alphanumeric, 8 positions; optional.

Work with SCF Tax Rates Screen (Change Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to review or work with tax rate information for an SCF. This screen includes historical information regarding when tax rules became effective for the SCF; however, only the most current SCF tax rate record, which displays at the top of the list, is currently in effect.

Note:

The system does not consider the settings at this screen if you use an external tax system unless the Use Standard Tax Calc if Tax Interface Communication Fails (J13) system control value is selected and the integration with the tax system fails.

How to display this screen: Select Work with tax rates for an SCF at the Work with SCF Codes Screen

Field	Description
Effect date (Effective date)	The date that this tax rate became effective. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Tax rate %	The default tax rate for this SCF. You can also define a tax rate for a postal code or for a country; for a description of the way that the system determines the tax rate that applies to an order see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). If you are using an external tax system to calculate tax, you would enter a tax rate of 100%. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
GST rate %	The default Canadian Goods and Services Tax (GST) rate for this SCF. You can also define a GST rate at the postal code level; the way that the system determines the tax rate that applies to an order is described earlier in this topic. If you are using an external tax system to calculate tax, you would enter a tax rate of 100%. If this field is blank but the SCF tax rates would normally apply to the order, the system uses the default GST Rate (A90) in the System Control table. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
PST rate %	The default Canadian Provincial Services Tax (PST) rate for this SCF. You can also define a PST rate at the postal code level; the way that the system determines the tax rate that applies to an order is described earlier in this topic. If you are using an external tax system to calculate tax, you would enter a tax rate of 100%. Numeric, 5 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
GST/PST method	Determines the sequence in which the Canadian Goods and Services Tax (GST) and the Provincial Services Tax (PST) are calculated. If you do not define a calculation method, the system does not charge either GST or PST on orders to this SCF even if you have defined GST or PST rates. Valid GST/PST tax calculation methods: blank = none GST PST Separate Optional.
Tax freight	Indicates whether there is a tax on freight in this SCF. This is controlled by state or province regulations in each jurisdiction. Valid values: Yes = Any dollar amount in the Freight and Freight + fields on the order is taxed. No = Any dollar amount in the Freight and Freight + fields on the order is not taxed. Note: Acts as an override to the Tax on Freight (B14) field in the System Control table if the system control value is selected. If the order uses the tax rate for the postal code, but the Tax freight field is unselected, the system uses the value from the System Control table. If the system control value is unselected, you cannot override this value by selecting it here.
Tax handling	The value indicates whether there is a tax on handling in this SCF. This is controlled by state or province regulations in each jurisdiction. Valid values: Yes = Any dollar amount in the Handling field on the order, with the exception of duty, is taxed. No = Any dollar amount in the Handling field on the order is not taxed. Acts as an override to the Tax on Handling (B15) field in the System Control table if the system control value is selected. If the order uses the tax rate for the SCF, but the Tax handling field is blank, the system uses the value from the System Control table. If the system control value is unselected, you cannot override this value by selecting it here. If the S/H exclude tax? field for the special handling code is selected, the handling charge is not evaluated for tax. You can override this setting by a setting at the zip code level; see Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP).

Screen Option	Procedure
Change existing tax rate information	Use the Tab key to advance to the tax information you want to change and type over it. Select Update when you are done.
Add new tax rate detail	Select Add to advance to the Work with SCF Tax Rates screen in Add mode. Use this screen to add a new SCF tax record. See above for field descriptions.
Delete a tax rate record	Select Delete for the tax rate record you want to delete. The system deletes the record immediately without displaying a confirmation message.

Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV)

Purpose: A Sectional Center Facility (SCF) code represents the first 3 digits of the destination postal code. A Ship Via code is used to indicate the areas (postal codes) where shippers deliver merchandise.

Ship via edit? The system uses this information in order entry, order maintenance, and the order API to ensure that the shipper assigned to the order can deliver to the shipping address on the order. If the Perform ship via edit? flag is selected for a country, you must create a record for every valid Ship Via/SCF combination. In this situation, if a record does not exist for the ship via on an order and the SCF of the shipping address, Order Entry displays a message such as: Ship via (11) is not valid with ship to zip code (088).

Use the Work with SCF Ship Via Values screen to work with SCF/ship via values. You can also create SCF/ship via values using Creating SCF Ship Vias by SCF Range (MSSV) or Editing SCF Ship Via (ESSV).

Note:

If the Perform ship via edit? flag is unselected for a country, it is not necessary to create SCF Ship Via values for that country. See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY) for more information.

In this topic:

• If the Postal Code is Optional for a Country
• Work with SCF Ship Via Values Screen
• Create SCF Ship Via Screen

If the Postal Code is Optional for a Country

If the Require postal code? flag for a country is unselected, you do not need to specify a postal or zip code for a customer address; however, if the country has the Perform ship via edit? flag selected, the system still validates the SCF/ship via combination for an order even when the address does not include a postal code. To do so, the system uses a default SCF code of # as a “wild card” SCF for SCF/ship via validation.

Example: You create an order for a customer from Ireland, where the postal code is optional. The customer’s address does not include a postal code. If you select the Perform ship via edit? flag for Ireland and enter a ship via code of 22, the system validates that there is an SCF/ship via record for an SCF of # and a ship via code of 22.

Setup: If you will create orders for customers in a country that does not require a postal code, use Working with SCF Codes (WSCF) to make sure that there is an SCF record for the country with an SCF code of #. You can then create SCF/ship via records for the # (wild card) SCF and each valid ship via for the country. It is not necessary to create a postal code record for the # SCF, or assign it to customer addresses.

See Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY) for more information about the address validation settings available for countries.

Work with SCF Ship Via Values Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSHV in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu, or select this option from a menu.

Field	Description
SCF code (Sectional Center Facility)	A code that represents the first 3 digits of a postal code. An SCF code of # serves as a “wild card” for countries where a postal code is optional. See If the Postal Code is Optional for a Country for more information. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Ship via	A code that represents the shipper; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Drop point	A code that represents one of your shipping warehouses or a central location to ship merchandise for consolidation; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Ship zone	The zone within the country where the package is being shipped in relation to the drop point. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Shipping lead days	The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to this SCF. Calculation for pick slip preparation: The system uses this number in conjunction with your internal lead days to determine when to generate pick slips for an order. The calculation is: Arrival Date from Order Line (or Order Ship To) - (Pick Processing Days (B37) + Ship Via Lead Days in WSHV) < or = Today's Date The system does not exclude weekends/holidays in its calculation. See Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation. Calculation for Alternate Shipping Charges by Via window: The system also uses this setting to calculate the Ship lead days and Expected delivery date to display at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, and this window uses a different calculation than the one described above. See the description of the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new SCF ship via value	Select Create to advance to the Create SCF Ship Via Screen.
Change an SCF ship via value	Select Change for an SCF/ship via value to advance to the Change SCF Ship Via screen. You can change only the Shipping zone and Shipping lead days fields on this screen. See Create SCF Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.
Delete an SCF ship via value	Select Delete for an SCF/ship via value to delete it.
Display an SCF ship via value	Select Display for an SCF/ship via value to advance to the Display SCF Ship Via screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create SCF Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.

Create SCF Ship Via Screen

To create an SCF ship via value: At the Work with SCF Ship Via Values Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
SCF code	The first 3 positions of the destination postal code. An SCF code of # serves as a “wild card” for countries where a postal code is optional. See If the Postal Code is Optional for a Country for more information. Validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Ship via code	The shipper to deliver merchandise to the customer, such as 01 (UPS). Validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 position. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Drop point	A code that represents one of your shipping warehouses or a central location to which merchandise will be shipped for consolidation. Drop points are used in zone skipping, which enables you to ship a carton by one carrier to a drop point, where another carrier picks up the carton and delivers it to its final destination. Note: If you are using the freight by order weight freight method, the drop point you define here must match the drop point you define in the Warehouse table. See Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB). Numeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Shipping zone	The zone within the country where the carton is being shipped in relation to the drop point. Shipping zones are sections of the country that are defined by UPS. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Shipping lead days	The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to this SCF. Calculation for pick slip preparation: The system uses this number in conjunction with your internal lead days to determine when to generate pick slips for an order. The calculation is: Arrival Date from Order Line (or Order Ship To) - (Pick Processing Days (B37) + Ship Via Lead Days in WSHV) < or = Today's Date The system does not exclude weekends/holidays in its calculation. See Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation. Calculation for Alternate Shipping Charges by Via window: The system also uses this setting to calculate the Ship lead days and Expected delivery date to display at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, and this window uses a different calculation than the one described above. See the description of the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Creating additional SCF/ship vias: After creating an SCF/ship via combination, select Duplicate Create to create the next. To make creating the next SCF/ship via easier, the screen retains all of the values from the previous SCF/ship via except the Ship via code and the Drop point.

Working with Shipping Rates (WSHR)

Purpose: You can use the Work with Shipping Rates menu option to set shipping rates for:

• charges you pay to a shipper for shipping a package to a customer; used when calculating best way shipping during pick slip generation
• charges to add to orders that use the Freight by Weight method (W), as defined in the source code on the order header; used during order entry and maintenance (

  Note:

  You do not use this menu option to work with rates for the Freight by Order Weight method (OW); see Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB).
  )

Each is described in this topic.

Shipping rate definition includes the ship via, delivery code (residential, business, or neither), shipping zone, and weight.

Round up or down? The system rounds the total weight of the order or pick slip up or down to the next whole pound. For best way shipping at pick slip generation, the system always rounds the total weight up. However, for Freight by Weight, the system rounds up if the weight ends in .50 or greater; the system rounds down if the weight ends in .49 or less.

Note:

The shipping rate must match the ship via, delivery code, zone and rounded-up weight exactly to apply to the order or pick slip. For example, if the total order weight is 11.5 pounds, and there is not a matching shipping rate for 12 pounds, the shipping rate will not apply for either best way shipping or Freight by Weight. When you are using Freight by Weight, no shipping rate will apply for shipments weighing .49 of a pound or less.

In this topic:

• Freight by Weight
• Work with Shipping Rates Screen
  • Create Shipping Rate Screen

Freight by Weight

Freight by weight is a freight method using the charges a customer pays you for shipping an order based on the total selling weight of the items. Evaluation for this freight method takes place during order entry or order maintenance.

To use freight by weight:

• set the freight method for a source code to Freight by Weight (W); see Working with Source Codes (WSRC)
• create shipping rates for each ship via; see Work with Shipping Rates Screen
• set the Sell weight for the item in Work with Item/SKUs; see Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM).

The total weight is rounded up for the purposes of freight by weight if the partial pound is .50 or more; otherwise, the total weight is rounded down. For example, if the total weight is 3.51 pounds, the 4 pound rate is used; if the total weight is 3.49 pounds, the 3 pound rate is used. Because partial pounds of .49 or lower are rounded down, no freight will be added to the order if the total weight is under a half pound.

Example: You are shipping an order to a business address in zip code 01760. The ship via on the order is 01, and the total weight of the shipment is 4.5 pounds. The shipping rate for ship via 01, zone 01 (for 01760), and 5 pounds is $2.00.

If the total shipping weight in the above example were 4.4 pounds, the system would round this total down and use the 4 pound shipping rate.

Work with Shipping Rates Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to work with shipping rates for freight by weight or best way shipping.

How to display this screen: Enter WSHR in the fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Work with Shipping Rates from a menu.

Field	Description
Ship via	A code that represents the shipper. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Delivery Code	A code that indicates the type of address for delivery. Valid values are: Business Residential No Distinction ( Note: Not a valid delivery code for UPS ) Certain shippers use the delivery code to determine shipping rates, charging a different rate for a delivery to a business address. Optional.
Weight	The weight of the shipment. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Zone	The shipping zone within the country where the shipping rate applies. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Rate	The charge to ship the package. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new shipping rate	Select Create to advance to the Create Shipping Rate Screen.
Change a shipping rate	Select Change for a shipping rate to advance to the Change Shipping Rate screen. At this screen, you can change only the rate. See Create Shipping Rate Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a shipping rate	Select Delete for a shipping rate and select OK to delete it.
Display a shipping rate	Select Display for a shipping rate to advance to the Display Shipping Rate screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Shipping Rate Screen for field descriptions.

Create Shipping Rate Screen

How to display this screen: At the Work with Shipping Rates Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Ship via	The shipper that will deliver merchandise to the customer. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Delivery code	This code identifies a business (commercial) or residential address. Used when shipping an order by a carrier that uses business or consumer rate tables (e.g., UPS). A code that indicates the type of address for delivery. Valid values are: Business Residential No Distinction ( Note: Not a valid delivery code for UPS ) Certain shippers use the delivery code to determine shipping rates, charging a different rate for a delivery to a business address. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Weight	The total weight of the shipment. The system uses the Sell weight (for Freight by Weight) defined in the Item table to calculate the total shipping weight for all units of each item included in the shipment. The system may round the total weight up or down to find a match in the shipping rate table; see the description Freight by Weight. You must define a shipping rate for each whole pound to have the system use the shipping rate. For example, if the total weight of the items is 3.75 pounds, the system uses the shipping rate defined for 4 pounds. If there is no matching shipping rate record for 4 pounds, then best way shipping or freight by weight will not apply. When you are using Freight by Weight, no shipping rate will apply for shipments weighing .49 of a pound or less. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Zone	The geographic zone where the merchandise is being shipped in relation to the drop point. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Rate	The shipping charge for this weight. In the case of freight by weight, this is the freight charge to add to the order. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.

Working with Drop Points (WDPT)

Drop points represent locations to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse. Typically, a drop point represents the address of a UPS facility. This drop point prints as the return address on the pick slip and is the destination to which undeliverable packages are returned. Drop points are also used to indicate the warehouse from which the merchandise was shipped. This is necessary in a multi-warehouse environment to determine the shipping zone. Each warehouse is assigned a drop point in the Warehouse table.

In this topic:

• Zone Skipping
• Work with Drop Point Screen
  • Create Drop Point Screen

Zone Skipping

Drop points are used in zone skipping. Zone skipping is used to deliver packages to a pre-assigned drop point by one carrier and picked up by another carrier who will deliver it to its final destination. Shipping charges are determined by the number of zones crossed; therefore, using zone skipping reduces delivery charges because less zones within the country are crossed.

Work with Drop Point Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete, or display drop points.

How to display this screen: Enter WDPT in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Field	Description
Drop point	A code that represents a drop point. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	The description of the drop point. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new drop point	Select Create to advance to the Create Drop Point Screen.
Change a drop point	Select Change for a drop point to advance to the Change Drop Point screen. At the Change screen you can change any information except the Drop Point code. See Create Drop Point Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a drop point	Select Delete for a drop point to delete it.
Display a drop point	Select Display for a drop point to advance to the Display Drop Point screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Drop Point Screen for field descriptions.

Create Drop Point Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a drop point.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Drop Point Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Drop point	A code that represents a location to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse, and a unique code assigned to each warehouse to indicate that merchandise is shipped directly from the warehouse to its final destination. Each warehouse must be assigned to a drop point. Drop points can be UPS facilities. Drop points print as the return address on the pick slip and are the destination to which undeliverable packages are returned. Drop points are used in zone skipping. Numeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	The description of the drop point. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
Address	The delivery address for this drop point, which may represent the shipping address to a UPS facility. This text prints as part of the return address on the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
City	The city name for this drop point, which may represent the city in which a UPS facility is located. This text prints as part of the return address on the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 25 positions; required.
State/zip/country	The state, zip code, and country in which this drop point is located. The state/zip/country may represent a UPS location. This text prints as part of the return address on the pick slip. Alphanumeric, 2 positions (state), 9 positions (zip), and 3 positions (country); required.

Editing Warehouse Drop Points (EWDP)

Purpose: Editing warehouse drop points is used to update warehouse, ship via, SCF, and drop point information all at once, rather than entering this information for each warehouse, drop point, etc.

This function is used only in zone skipping. If you do not use zone skipping in your organization, you should not be concerned with editing warehouse drop points. See Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen.

Drop points represent locations to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse. Typically, a drop point represents the address of a UPS facility. Drop points are used in zone skipping. You use zone skipping when you instruct one carrier to deliver packages to a pre-assigned drop point and another carrier to pick them up and deliver them to their final destinations. Shipping charges are determined by the number of zones crossed; therefore, using zone skipping reduces delivery charges because less zones within the country are crossed. See Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen.

In this topic:

• Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Enter Mode)
• Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Change Mode)
• Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode)
  • Enter SCF Range Pop-up Window
  • Copy Warehouse Drop Point Pop-up Window

Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Enter Mode)

Purpose: This is the first screen used to change and copy warehouse drop points.

How to display this screen: Enter EWDP in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Field	Description
Warehouse	A code that represents the warehouse. Validated against the Warehouse table; see Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS). Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Ship via	A code that represents the carrier of this shipment. Validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Copy a warehouse drop point	Enter the Warehouse and Ship via codes and select Copy to advance to the Copy Warehouse Drop Point Pop-up Window.

Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Change Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to change or create a drop point, and to enter the SCF range for a drop point.

How to display this screen: Complete the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Enter Mode).

Field	Description
Warehouse	The warehouse code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via code	The ship via code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
SCF	A code that represents the first 3 positions of a postal code. Validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
States	The primary states or provinces associated with this SCF. The system displays this information based on the SCF selected. State codes are defined in and validated against the state table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Transfer days	The number of days it takes to transfer the order from the warehouse to the drop point. This may be a centralized warehouse (in which you must ship from one warehouse to another) or a drop point (which is a place where another shipper picks up the package and delivers it to its final destination to save shipping charges). Used by the system to calculate when to print pick slips. Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Drop point	A code that represents the drop point. Validated against the Drop Point table; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a warehouse drop point	Select Create to advance to the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode).
Delete a warehouse drop point	Select Delete for a drop point to delete it.
Define an SCF range	Select Create Range to advance to the Enter SCF Range Pop-up Window.

Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a warehouse drop point.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Change Mode).

Field	Description
Warehouse	The warehouse code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via code	The ship via code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
SCF	A code that represents the first 3 positions of the destination postal code. Validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
States	Not implemented on this screen.
Transfer days	The number of days it takes to transfer the order from the warehouse to the drop point. This may be a centralized warehouse (in which you must ship from one warehouse to another), or a drop point (which is a place where another shipper picks up the package and delivers it to its final destination to save shipping charges). Used to determine when to print pick slips. Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Drop point	A code that represents the drop point. Validated against the Drop Point table; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Enter an SCF range for a drop point	Select Create Range to advance to the Enter SCF Range Pop-up Window.
Change an SCF code	Select Change to return to the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Change Mode).

Enter SCF Range Pop-up Window

Purpose: Use this window to set up drop point information for a range of SCF codes.

How to display this window: Select Create Range at the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode) or at the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Change Mode).

Field	Description
Country	The country for which you are entering an SCF range.
SCF Range	The range of SCF numbers included in this drop point.
Transfer Days	The number of days it takes to transfer the order from the warehouse to the drop point. See Transfer days. Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Drop Point	A code that represents the drop point. Validated against the Drop Point table. Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Copy Warehouse Drop Point Pop-up Window

To copy a warehouse drop point: Enter the Warehouse and Ship Via codes, then select Create Range to display the Copy Warehouse Drop Point pop-up window.

Field	Description
Copy to warehouse	The new warehouse. The system will use the warehouse code entered at the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode) or (Change Mode) and copy it to the new warehouse. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Copy to ship via	The new ship via. The system will use the ship via code entered at the Edit Warehouse Drop Point Screen (Add Mode) or (Change Mode) and copy it to the new ship via. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.

Editing SCF Ship Via (ESSV)

Purpose: Editing SCF ship via is used to update SCF and drop point information all at once, rather than entering this information for each SCF or drop point.

Drop points represent locations to which merchandise will be shipped from your warehouse. Typically, a drop point represents the address of a UPS facility. Drop points are used in zone skipping. You use zone skipping when you instruct one carrier to deliver packages to a pre-assigned drop point and another carrier to pick them up and deliver them to their final destinations. Shipping charges are determined by the number of zones crossed; therefore, using zone skipping reduces delivery charges because less zones within the country are crossed. See Work with Ship Via Indicia Screen for more information on zone skipping.

In this topic:

• Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Enter Mode)
• Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Change Mode)
• Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode)
• Copy SCF Ship Via Pop-up Window

Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Enter Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to change and copy SCF ship via information.

How to display this screen: Enter ESSV in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu.

Field	Description
Drop point	A code that represents the drop point; see Working with Drop Points (WDPT). Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Ship via	A code that represents a carrier for this shipment. Validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Copy a ship via	Enter the Drop Point and Ship via codes and select Copy to advance to the Copy SCF Ship Via Pop-up Window.

Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Change Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to edit SCF ship via information.

How to display this screen: Enter a drop point and ship via code at the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Enter Mode), or select Create at the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode).

Field	Description
Drop point	The drop point code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via code	The ship via code and description which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Country	The country where the SCF is located. Validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
SCF	A code that represents the first 3 positions of a postal code. Validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
States	The primary states or provinces associated with this SCF. The system displays this information based on the SCF selected. There can be up to five states associated with an SCF. State codes are defined in and validated against the state table, which is accessible through the Work with Countries menu option; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Zone	The zone within the country to which the carton is being shipped in relation to the drop point. Zones are geographical sections of the country that are defined by UPS. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Lead days	The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to this SCF. Calculation for pick slip generation: The system uses this number in conjunction with your internal lead days to determine when to generate pick slips for an order. The calculation is: Arrival date - Shipping lead days < or = Today’s date . The system does not exclude weekends/holidays in its calculation. Calculation for Alternate Shipping Charges by Via window: The system also uses this setting to calculate the Ship lead days and Expected delivery date to display at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, and this window uses a different calculation than the one described above. See the description of the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create an SCF ship via	Select Create to advance to the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode).
Delete an SCF ship via	Select Delete for an SCF ship via to delete it.

Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode)

Purpose: Use this screen to enter new SCF/ship via information. When you select OK, your entries are created and disappear from the screen.

To create an SCF ship via: At the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Change Mode), select Create.

Field	Description
Drop point	The drop point code and description, which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via code	The ship via code and description, which are carried over from the previous screen. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.
Country	The country where the SCF is located. Validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
SCF	A code that represents the first 3 positions of a postal code. Validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
States	These fields are not implemented on the screen in ADD mode.
Zone	The zone within the country to which the carton is being shipped in relation to the drop point. Zones are geographical sections of the country that are defined by UPS. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Lead days	The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to this SCF. Calculation for pick slip generation: The system uses this number in conjunction with your internal lead days to determine when to generate pick slips for an order. The calculation is: Arrival date - Shipping lead days < or = Today’s date . The system does not exclude weekends/holidays in its calculation. Calculation for Alternate Shipping Charges by Via window: The system also uses this setting to calculate the Ship lead days and Expected delivery date to display at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, and this window uses a different calculation than the one described above. See the description of the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; required.

Screen Option	Procedure
Change an SCF ship via	Select Change to display the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Change Mode). At this screen you can change any information except the Drop Point and Ship Via codes.

Copy SCF Ship Via Pop-up Window

To copy an SCF ship via: At the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Enter Mode), enter the Drop Point and Ship Via codes, then select Copy.

Field	Description
Copy to drop point	The new drop point. The system will use the drop point code entered at the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode) or (Change Mode) and copy it to the new drop point. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Copy to ship via	The new ship via. The system will use the ship via code entered at the Edit SCF Ship Via Screen (Add Mode) or (Change Mode) and copy it to the new ship via. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; required.

Working with Dunnage Weight (WDUN)

Dunnage weight is the weight of packing materials. Use the Work with Dunnage Weight menu option to define the weight of dunnage based on the cube of the items on a pick slip.

As pick slips are created during pick slip generation, the cube of the pick is used to determine the extra weight to be added to the pick slip for the packing materials. The extra weight is added to the weight of the pick and the total weight is rounded up to the next pound. This total weight is included in the calculation for best way shipping; see Working with Shipping Rates (WSHR).

In this topic:

• Work with Dunnage Weight Screen
• Create Dunnage Weight Pop-up Window

Work with Dunnage Weight Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WDUN in the Fast Path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Dunnage Weight from a menu.

Field	Description
Ship via	A code that represents the shipper; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Carton cube	A code that represents the total cubic volume of the carton. Numeric, 10 positions; optional.
Dunnage weight	The amount of weight to add to the total carton weight when calculating the total shipping weight. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a dunnage weight	Select Create to advance to the display the Create Dunnage Weight Pop-up Window.
Change a dunnage weight	Select Change for a dunnage weight to display the Change Dunnage Weight window. At this window, you can change only the weight itself. See Create Dunnage Weight Pop-up Window for field descriptions.
Delete a dunnage weight	Select Delete for a dunnage weight to delete it. Note: The dunnage weight is deleted immediately; the system does not display a confirmation pop-up window.

Create Dunnage Weight Pop-up Window

To create a dunnage weight: At the Work with Dunnage Weight Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Ship via	The ship via code for this carrier. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions. Create window: required. Change window: display-only.
Maximum cube	The maximum cubic value for a carton. You cannot create more than one dunnage weight for the same ship via/cube number combination. Numeric, 10 positions. Create window: required. Change window: display-only.
Dunnage weight	The weight of the packing materials. This weight is added to the total weight of the pick slip in pick generation before before evaluating pick slips for best way shipping. Leave this field blank to indicate that the dunnage weight is zero. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.

Working with Zip/Ship Via (WZSV)

Purpose: Use the Zip/Ship Via table to cross-reference default shippers for specific destinations, based on postal code. You can also use this option to indicate that a best way shipping surcharge applies to the ship via.

Ship via override: When you accept an order in order entry, the system checks the Zip/Ship Via table for a default shipper if the shipper specified on the order allows auto-assignment of carrier (the ship via'sAllow auto assignment = Selected). If auto-assignment is allowed and there is a default ship via defined for the postal code, the system substitutes the original ship via with the default ship via automatically.

Note:

The shipper substitution occurs only if:

• you are using the Order/Recap screen, as defined by the Display Order Recap (A75) system control value, and
• the Allow auto assignment field for the ship via currently on the order is selected.
• another ship via override does not take precedence; see Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a list of ways the system can override the shipper specified on the order with another shipper and the hierarchy in which the ship via overrides take precedence.

In this topic:

• Work with Zip Ship Via Screen
  • Create Zip/Ship Via Screen

Work with Zip Ship Via Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WZSV in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select the Work with Zip/Ship Via option from a menu.

Field	Description
Zip code	A code for a geographical delivery area, as defined by the United States Postal Service or other federal office. See Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP). Alphanumeric, 5 positions; optional.
Ship via	The code for the carrier that will deliver the package to the customer. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Status	A code that controls if (and how) this shipper can be used to deliver packages to the postal code. Valid values are: Allow = The shipper is allowed to ship to this postal code. Exclude = The shipper cannot ship to this postal code. Default = This ship via will be substituted automatically when you accept a new order if the ship via on the order is set up to allow automatic assignment of carrier and another ship via override does not take precedence. Surcharge = A surcharge applies to deliveries in this postal code by this shipper for the purposes of calculating best way shipping at pick slip generation. You define the amount of the surcharge in the Ship Via table. This setting is not currently implemented. Optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a zip/ship via	Select Create to advance to the Create Zip/Ship Via Screen.
Change a zip/ship via	Select Change for a zip/ship via to advance to the Change Zip/Ship Via screen. At this screen, you can change only the Status field. See Create Zip/Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a zip/ship via	Select Delete for a zip/ship via to delete it.
Display a zip/ship via	Select Display for a zip/ship via to advance to the Display Zip/Ship Via screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Zip/Ship Via Screen for field descriptions.

Create Zip/Ship Via Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a zip/ship via combination.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Zip Ship Via Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Zip code	A code for a geographical delivery area, as defined by the United States Postal Service or other federal office. Zip, or postal, codes are defined in and validated against the Zip/City/State table. See Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP). Alphanumeric, 5 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Ship via	The code for the carrier that will deliver the package to the customer. Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Status	A code that controls if (and how) this shipper can be used to deliver packages to the postal code. Valid values are: Allow = The shipper is allowed to ship to this postal code. Exclude = The shipper cannot ship to this postal code. The system issues a message similar to the following during Order Entry if you use a shipper that is excluded from shipping to the destination postal code: Ship via (3) is not valid with ship to zip code (017) . Default = This ship via will be substituted automatically when you accept the new order; this substitution occurs only if: you are using the Order/Recap screen, as defined by the Display Order Recap (A75) system control value, and the Allow auto assignment field for the ship via currently on the order is selected, and another ship via override does not take precedence; see Ship Via Override Hierarchy Surcharge = A surcharge applies to deliveries in this postal code by this shipper for the purposes of calculating best way shipping at pick slip generation, in which the system selects the least expensive ship via for a pick slip. You define the amount of the surcharge through Working with Shipping Rates (WSHR). This surcharge is not considered as part of best way shipping evaluation in order entry; see Working with Best Way Ship Vias. This setting is not currently implemented. Required.

Working with Tax Jurisdiction (WTXJ)

Tax Jurisdictions define postal code ranges for an area where a special tax structure exists. For example, tax jurisdictions exist for some counties in New York and New Jersey. Standard tax reporting does not identify taxes collected at the jurisdiction level.

Taxes are calculated from tax rates set up for an SCF, postal code, or for the country itself. The system calculates tax differently depending on whether you use VAT and tax-inclusive pricing, as controlled by the Tax Included in Price (E70) system control values.

Alternatively, you can use an external tax system to calculate sales tax on your orders and to maintain the tax rates appropriately. See Vertex Interface and Avalara AvaTax Interface.

Note:

You can use this menu option to define tax jurisdictions within the United States only.

Tax jurisdiction report: The Tax Jurisdiction Report identifies the dollars collected and dollars credited for each tax jurisdiction for a specified invoice date range; see Printing the Tax Jurisdiction Report (PTXJ) for more information on this report.

In this topic:

• Work with Tax Jurisdiction Screen
  • Create Tax Jurisdiction Screen

Work with Tax Jurisdiction Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WTXJ in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Tax Jurisdiction from a menu.

Field	Description
Tax jurisdiction	The area for which a special tax structure exists. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Description	The description associated with the tax jurisdiction. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.
From postal code	The lowest postal code in the range of postal codes for this tax jurisdiction. A special tax structure exists for the entire area included in this range of postal codes. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
To postal code	The highest postal code in the range of postal codes for this tax jurisdiction. A special tax structure exists for the entire area included in this range of postal codes. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a tax jurisdiction	Select Create to advance to the Create Tax Jurisdiction Screen.
Change a tax jurisdiction	Select Change for a jurisdiction to advance to the Change Tax Jurisdiction screen. At the Change screen you can change the Description field. See Create Tax Jurisdiction Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a tax jurisdiction	Select Delete for a jurisdiction to delete it. If there has been any order activity within the tax jurisdiction area, a message similar to the following displays: WARNING - DEPENDENT RECORDS EXIST The message tells you that history exists for the tax jurisdiction in the Tax Jurisdiction History table, including information on the amount of tax charged and credited. You will lose this history if you delete the jurisdiction.
Display a tax jurisdiction	Select Display for a jurisdiction to advance to the Display Tax Jurisdiction screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Tax Jurisdiction Screen for field descriptions.

Create Tax Jurisdiction Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a tax jurisdiction.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Tax Jurisdiction Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Tax jurisdiction	The area for which a special tax structure exists. Alphanumeric, 10 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	The description associated with the tax jurisdiction. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.
From postal code	The lowest postal code in the range of postal codes for this tax jurisdiction. A special tax structure exists for the entire area included in this range of postal codes. Your entry is validated against the SCF table. An SCF is a geographic location identified by the first 3 characters of the postal code. In the SCF table, you define the states or provinces included in the SCF and specify the associated tax and freight structure. Note: The system does not allow you to set up tax jurisdictions with overlapping postal codes. Alphanumeric, 10 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
To postal code	The highest postal code in the range of postal codes for this tax jurisdiction. A special tax structure exists for the entire area included in this range of postal codes. Your entry is validated against the SCF table. An SCF is a geographic location identified by the first 3 characters of the postal code. In the SCF table, you define the states or provinces included in the SCF and specify the associated tax and freight structure. Alphanumeric, 10 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.

Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB)

Purpose: Use Work with Freight Tables to create and maintain freight tables for use with the order weight freight method, defined in the Source Code table.

Freight by order weight involves calculating the freight charges for an order by evaluating the number of cartons you expect the order will require to ship, and the weight of each carton. The tables you create with this function define the freight charges to add to an order based on the weight of each carton.

When calculated: In order entry, the system calculates freight by order weight during repricing, the initial and final order accept, and when you select to change the last line on the order if you do not change its order quantity. The Freight field on the order does not include order weight freight charges as you add lines to the order; however, the system does display ship via service charges and ship via weight charges immediately. When the system calculates freight by order weight, the system updates the Freight field for the order with the complete freight amount.

In order maintenance, the system calculates freight by order weight as you add or change each line on the order. The Freight field on the order includes all freight charges as changes to freight are made to the order.

Setup: In order to use this freight method, you must set up information correctly in several additional tables. See Freight by Order Weight Setup for instructions on setting up the order weight freight method.

Logic and examples: See Freight by Order Weight Calculation Logic and Examples for the logic that the system uses to calculate freight by order weight.

Removing additional charges: During Order Entry, if you remove additional charges from the order when using the freight by order weight freight method, the system adds the additional charges back to the order when it calls repricing during the final order accept.

In this topic:

• Freight by Order Weight Calculation Logic and Examples
• Freight by Order Weight Setup
• Work with Freight Table Header Screen
  • Create Freight Table Screen
• Work with Freight Table Details Screen
  • Create Freight Table Details Screen
• Copy Freight Table Details Screen

Freight by Order Weight Calculation Logic and Examples

Calculation: The system uses the following steps in calculating freight by order weight:

During order entry, the system calculates freight by order weight during repricing, the initial and final order accept, and when you change the last line on the order if you do not change its order quantity. The system adds together the weight of all non-ship alone items that have the same shipper and arrival date. The system calculates freight on ship-alone items separately (as defined by the field in the Item table).

Order lines for a negative quantity: The system does not include order lines with a negative quantity in the freight by order weight calculation.

Freight by Order Weight in Order Maintenance: During Order Maintenance, the system calculates freight by order weight each time you add or change an item on the order.

Example: An order includes the following non-ship alone items with the same ship via and arrival date:

Item	Weight	Quantity	Total Weight
1234	10 lbs.	1	10 lbs.
5678	20 lbs.	2	40 lbs.
9123	30 lbs.	1	30 lbs.
		Total	80 lbs.

The system determines how many pounds to allocate to each carton, based on the Maximum carton weight defined for the ship via on the order and the value defined in the Extra Weight for Order Weight Freight Method (D85) system control value.

Example:

Maximum carton weight = 30 lbs.

Extra carton weight = 1 lb.

Pounds to allocate per carton = 29 lbs. (30 - 1)

The system then determines how many cartons the items would require to ship.

Note:

The actual number of cartons you use to ship these items may differ; these calculations are used for assigning a freight amount to the order only.

Example: 80 lbs. (step 1) divided by 29 lbs. (step 2) = 2 full cartons with a remainder of 22 lbs. in a partial carton

The system then consults the freight table for each full carton, and the final, partial carton, adding the freight amount from the table defined for that weight to the order for each carton. The system includes the extra weight defined in the Extra Weight for Order Weight Freight Method (D85) system control value in each carton weight.

Note:

In order to assign a freight amount to the order, the system must find a record on the freight table with the correct ship via, business/residence flag, shipping zone and weight. See Freight by Order Weight Setup.

Example: The freight table contains the following matching records:

Weight	Freight Amount
10 lbs.	$5.00
15 lbs.	$6.00
20 lbs.	$7.00
25 lbs.	$8.00
30 lbs.	$9.00

The system adds the following freight amounts to the order:

Carton	Calculation	Result
first carton (30 lbs.)	=	$9.00
second carton (30 lbs.)	=	$9.00
third carton (22 + 1 lbs.)	=	$8.00
Total freight	=	$26.00

Note:

The freight table is an “up to” table, meaning that the system selects the lowest freight amount from the table that is greater than or equal to the order weight.

The system repeats the above steps for each different ship via/arrival date combination on the order.

Ship-alone items: The system consults the freight table separately for each ship-alone item on the order.

Example: The order in the above example included the following ship-alone items

Item	Quantity	Weight
ABCD	2	10 lbs.

The system consults the freight table separately for each item as follows:

10 lbs. + 1 lb. carton weight from the System Control table = 11 lbs. per carton

The system adds an additional $6.00 to the order for each carton.

Include Weight of all Items in Freight by Order Weight: If the Include Weight of all Items in Freight by Order Weight (G05) system control value is selected, the system adds together the weight of all non-ship alone items and ship alone items, regardless of the item's shipper or arrival date. This way the system consults the freight table once for all of the items on the order.

Calculate Freight by Order Weight for N/C Orders: If the Calculate Freight by Order Weight for N/C Orders (G68) system control value is selected, the system calculates freight by order weight for an order whose merchandise total is zero. You might wish to calculate freight for an order whose merchandise total is zero if the order includes a warranty item.

Excluding an item from the freight calculation: You can set up an item to be excluded from the total weight for freight calculation purposes by creating an exemption through Working with Freight Exempt Items (WFEI). Additionally, you must have the Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) system control value selected. See Freight by Order Weight Setup for more information on required setup.

Freight by Order Weight Setup

Purpose: A freight table used to calculate freight for a given source code must contain a record for every combination of shipper, business or residence flag, geographical zone and weight possible for orders using that source code. If the system does not find a matching record on the freight table, freight by order weight will not be added to the order. Instructions for setting up freight tables are provided later in this topic. In addition, you must set up the following fields:

Table	Field Name	Valid Value
Working with Source Codes (WSRC)	Freight method	Order Weight
	Freight table	code representing the freight table defined through Work with Freight Tables
	Price method	Regular Plus Reprice
Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA)	Maximum carton weight	weight for the system to use when calculating how many items can fit in each carton
Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)	Sell wgt. (Selling weight)	weight of the item
	Ship alone	blank (' ') for non-ship alone items or Ship Alone
System Control (WSYS)	Extra Weight for Order Weight Freight Method (D85)	extra weight to subtract from each carton's capacity when calculating how many items can fit in the carton, and to add to the order weight for each carton
	Include Weight of all Items in Freight by Order Weight (G05)	selected, if you wish the system to add together the weight of all non-ship alone items and ship alone items, regardless of the item's shipper or arrival date Note: Set this value to unselected if you are using an item freight exemption; see below.
	Calculate Freight by Order Weight for N/C Orders (G68)	selected, if you wish the system to calculate freight by order weight for orders whose merchandise total is zero Set this value to unselected if you are using an item freight exemption; see below.
	Default Warehouse (A04)	a warehouse code
Creating and Maintaining Warehouses (WWHS) Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV)	Drop point	both drop points must be the same

Additional required setup to have item freight exemptions in freight by order weight calculation:

• Use Item Freight Exemption File (E73) system control value must be selected
• Include Weight of all Items in Freight by Order Weight (G05) must be unselected
• Calculate Freight by Order Weight for N/C Orders (G68) must be unselected

Troubleshooting: Any of the following conditions will cause the system to fail to calculate freight by order weight correctly:

• no Sell wgt. (Selling weight) defined for an item
• no Maximum carton weight defined for the ship via
• an order dollar total of zero if the Calculate Freight by Order Weight for N/C Orders (G68) system control value is unselected
• a carton weight defined for the Ship Via that exceeds the highest related freight table record
• Additional freight only selected for the Ship Via
• Ship via on the order header not found on the freight table
• Delivery code on the order header not found on the freight table
• Shipping zone for the SCF/Ship Via on the order not the same as the Shipping zone on the freight table
• the customer has a loyalty membership that provides free freight

Note:

If you use the Best Way Ship Via for Auto-Assignment (J67) and there are no freight table records for the “dummy” ship via, there will not be any freight charges on the order until the system overrides the ship via on the order to the actual ship via with the lowest shipping charges.

Work with Freight Table Header Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review existing freight table headers, to create, change, copy or delete a freight table, or to advance to the Work with Freight Table Detail screen.

How to display this screen: Enter WFTB in the Fast path field at the top of a menu, or select Work with Freight Tables from a menu.

Field	Description
Freight table	The code defining a freight table to use for order weight freight. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	The description associated with the freight table. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a new freight table	Select Create to advance to the Create Freight Table Screen.
Change a freight table	Select Change for a freight table to advance to the Change Freight Table screen. See Create Freight Table Screen for field descriptions. At the Change screen you can change only the Description field.
Copy freight table details	Select Copy for a freight table to advance to the Copy Freight Table Details Screen.
Delete a freight table	Select Delete for a freight table to delete it.
Work with freight table details	Select Work with Details for a freight table to advance to the Work with Freight Table Details Screen.

Create Freight Table Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a new freight table header. The header consists of the freight table code and description; in order to use the freight table, you must create both the header and detail. See Work with Freight Table Details Screen.

How to display this screen: Select Create at the Work with Freight Table Header Screen.

Field	Description
Freight table	The code defining a freight table for use with the order weight freight method. You enter this code in the Source code field of the Source Code table for any source code to use this freight table. Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	The description associated with the freight table. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Completing this screen: You advance to the Work with Freight Table Details Screen, where you can create freight table detail. You return to the Create Freight Table screen.

Work with Freight Table Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create, change, delete or display freight table detail associated with the freight table header. The system consults this table when you enter an order whose source code points to this freight table.

How to display this screen: Select Work with Details for a freight table at the Work with Freight Table Header Screen. You also advance to this screen when you select OK to accept a new freight table header at the Create Freight Table Screen.

Field	Description
Freight table	A code representing the freight table. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via	A code representing the shipper to deliver merchandise to your customers. Validated against the Ship Via table. Numeric, 2 positions; optional.
Del cde (Delivery code)	A code representing the type of delivery address on an order. Valid values are: Business Residential No Distinction Optional.
Zone	The geographical region where the shipper delivers packages. UPS uses zones to calculate rates. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Weight	The maximum amount that a carton can weigh for the dollar amount defined for the freight table to apply. This is an “up to” field; the system selects the lowest freight table record whose weight is equal to or greater than the carton weight. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal; optional.
Rate	The dollar amount to charge for a carton whose weight matches this freight table record. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a freight table record	Select Create to advance to the Create Freight Table Details Screen.
Change a freight table record	Select Change for a record to advance to the Change Freight Table Details screen. See Create Freight Table Details Screen for field descriptions. At the Change screen you can change the Rate field. To change any other information, you must delete the record and create a new one.
Delete a freight table record	Select Delete for a record to delete it.
Display a freight table record	Select Display for a record to advance to the Display Freight Table Details screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Freight Table Details Screen for field descriptions.

Create Freight Table Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create freight table details.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Freight Table Details Screen, select Create. See Freight by Order Weight Setup for more information on setting up a freight table.

Field	Description
Freight table	The code representing a table that the system consults to calculate freight on orders using the order weight freight method. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Ship via	The code representing a shipper who delivers merchandise to your customers. Validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Delivery code	A code representing the type of delivery address on an order. Valid values are: Business Residential No Distinction Some shippers, such as UPS, charge different rates based on the type of delivery address. Only Business and Residential are valid delivery codes for a UPS ship via; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Create screen: optional. Change screen: display-only.
Zone	The geographical region where the shipper delivers packages. UPS uses relative geographic zones, defined by SCF, to calculate shipping rates. See About Zones. Numeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Weight	The maximum amount that a carton can weigh for the dollar amount defined for this freight table record to apply. This is an “up to” field; the system selects the first freight table record whose weight is equal to or greater than the carton weight. Example: If you have records in your freight table for 10, 20 and 30 pounds, a carton weighing 11 pounds will match the 20-pound record. Numeric, 13 positions with a 3-place decimal. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Rate	The amount to charge for shipping a carton that matches the freight table record. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.

Note:

In order to match the freight table record, the order must have the same Ship via and Delivery code as the freight table record. In addition, the Shipping zone defined for the SCF/Ship Via on the order must match the Zone defined for the freight table record, and the carton weight must be less than or equal to the Weight defined for the freight table record. See Freight by Order Weight Setup.

Copy Freight Table Details Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to copy freight table detail records from an existing freight table to another freight table header.

How to display this screen: Select Copy for an existing freight table at the Work with Freight Table Header Screen.

How to use this screen: Enter an existing freight table code in the To freight table field. If the freight table you select as the destination for copying already has detail records, the following message displays:

Freight Table Details already exist for To Freight Table

If you enter a valid freight table code without existing detail records as your destination table, the Confirm prompt field displays. Select this field to copy the detail records to the destination freight table, or select OK to cancel the copy.

Working with Offer Ship Via Assignment (WSVA)

Purpose: Use the Offer Ship Via table to define ship via overrides for qualifying orders based on offer or source code, dollar total, and, optionally, SCF.

If an order, or any shipping address on an order, qualifies for a ship via override based on the information you define in this table, the system will change the ship via when you select Accept or Accept/Add Recip. to accept the order. If you use the Order Recap screen, the new ship via code will appear there; otherwise, the ship via override will be transparent to the operator.

You use the Dollar Method Used to Evaluate Offer Ship Via Override (E50) system control value to specify whether the system uses the order or merchandise total to determine whether an order qualifies for ship via override.

In this topic:

• Ship Via Override Logic
• Work with Offer Ship Via Screen
  • Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override)
• Copy Offer Ship Via Screen

Ship Via Override Logic

The system uses the following guidelines in determining when and how to override the ship via on an order based on the Offer Ship Via table.

When does the override take place? The system evaluates each shipping address on an order for ship via override only once: when you select Accept or Accept/Add Recip. to accept the order or shipping address. If you make additional changes to the order in either Order Entry or Order Maintenance, the system will not reevaluate the order.

What items count toward the total? The system does not evaluate an order for ship via override unless there is at least one reserved item on the order. However, the system does include item prices from held and backordered lines in the qualifying order totals for ship via override.

How does the system calculate the qualifying total? The system checks the Dollar Method Used to Evaluate Offer Ship Via Override (E50) field in the System Control table. If you set this field to MERCH, the system compares the merchandise total, including any discounts, on the order with the dollar amount specified for the ship via override. If you set this field to ORDER TOTL, the system compares the order total, including the net of all positive or negative charges. If you leave this field blank, the system does not evaluate the order for the ship via override.

What if you override the source code on an order line? The system uses the source code on the order header to determine whether an order is eligible for a ship via override. If you override the source code or offer on an individual order line, the system does not consider this information when evaluating the order for ship via override; additionally, the dollar total for that line still counts toward the qualifying order dollar total. Similarly, if you specify a ship via for an item by entering the ship via in the Item table, the system still counts that item price toward the qualifying total for ship via override. The header-level ship via override would still occur, even if this item is the only item on the order.

What if the order qualifies for more than one offer/source code override? If the order qualifies for a ship via override based on both offer and source code, the system selects the override based on source code. If the order qualifies for more than one ship via override within source code or offer, the system selects the override with the highest dollar total for which the order qualifies. For example, an order meets the criteria for the following ship via overrides:

Offer or Source?	Dollar Total
offer	200.00
source	100.00
source	150.00

The system uses the ship via associated with the third override presented above.

What if the operator overrides the ship via on the order? The ship via on the order header must be the same one specified in the Default Ship Via (A77) field in the System Control table for the system to evaluate the order for ship via override. This means that if you change the default ship via on the Default Values for Orders screen or at the order header, the system does not evaluate the order for an offer ship via override. The same logic holds true if there is no Default Ship Via (A77) specified in the System Control table; if the ship via on the order header does not match the system control value (that is, it is not blank), the system does not evaluate the order for ship via override. The rule of thumb is this: the system compares the ship via on the order header with the ship via in the Default Ship Via (A77) field to determine whether to override, regardless of how the ship via came to be on the order header.

Are there other ship via overrides that might apply to the order? There are several other ways you can apply a ship via override to an order. See Ship Via Override Hierarchy for a table listing ship via overrides and the hierarchy in which the overrides apply.

Ship via override examples: If you want to offer an automatic upgrade to overnight delivery for a source code, you could set up an override for the source code with a dollar total of $.01. If you want to offer free or reduced-price Federal Express delivery for orders over a certain dollar total, you would create an additional ship via, identical to your regular Federal Express ship via but with different freight charge information. As with any ship via, you must be sure that you have created the ship via/SCF combination in the SCF Ship Via table, or order entry displays an error message.

For more information:

• Default Ship Via (A77)or Dollar Method Used to Evaluate Offer Ship Via Override (E50) system control values
• ship via codes: Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA)
• entering orders: Order Entry Entering Orders
• setting up a default ship via for an item: Performing Initial Item Entry (MITM)
• working with zip/ship via: Working with Zip/Ship Via (WZSV)
• working with default ship via by SCF: Working with SCF Codes (WSCF)
• setting up SCF/ship via combinations: Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) and Editing SCF Ship Via (ESSV).

Work with Offer Ship Via Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WSVA in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Offer Ship Via Assignment from a menu.

Field	Description
Ofr	The offer associated with a ship via override. Orders whose source codes point to this offer are eligible for the override if they also have a qualifying dollar amount. See Working with Offers (WOFR). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Source	The source code associated with a ship via override. Orders with this source code are eligible for the override if they also have a qualifying dollar amount. See Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Alphanumeric, 9 positions; optional.
Order total	The order total required to be eligible for the ship via override. The system checks the Dollar Method Used to Evaluate Offer Ship Via Override (E50) field in the System Control table to determine whether to use the merchandise total or order dollar total, including all other charges. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; optional.
From SCF	The lowest SCF in the range of SCFs to qualify for the ship via override. See Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
To SCF	The highest SCF in the range of SCFs to qualify for the ship via override. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Via (Ship via)	The code representing a shipper who delivers merchandise to your customers. An order that meets the criteria defined for the override is eligible to have its shipper changed to this ship via. See Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a ship via override	Select Create to advance to the Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override).
Change a ship via override	Select Change for a ship via override to advance to the Change Offer Ship Via screen. You can change any of the fields at this screen. See Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override) for field descriptions.
Delete a ship via override	Select Delete for a ship via override to delete it.
Display a ship via override	Select Display for a ship via override to advance to the Display Offer Ship Via screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override) for field descriptions.
Copy a ship via override information for an offer or source	Select Copy to advance to the Copy Offer Ship Via Screen.

Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a ship via override.

How to display this screen: At the Work with Offer Ship Via Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Offer	The offer associated with the ship via override. Orders whose header-level source codes point to this offer will be eligible for the override. If the order would be eligible for both a source code-related and an offer-related override, the system uses the source code-related override record. You must specify either an offer or a source code for the override, but not both. Offer codes are defined in and validated against the Offer table; see Working with Offers (WOFR). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required if you do not enter a source code.
Source	The source code associated with the ship via override. Orders with this source code at the header will be eligible for the override. If the order would be eligible for both a source code-related and an offer-related override, the system uses the source code-related override record. You must specify either an offer or a source code for the override, but not both. Source codes are defined in and validated against the Source Code table; see Working with Source Codes (WSRC). Alphanumeric, 9 positions; required if you do not enter an offer code.
Total	The dollar total of the order required to be eligible for the override. The system checks the Dollar Method Used to Evaluate Offer Ship Via Override (E50) field in the System Control table to determine whether to use the merchandise total or order dollar total, including all other charges. If an order would be eligible for more than one override for a source code or offer, the system uses the override with the highest dollar value for which the order qualifies. You can set this field to .01 to create an automatic ship via override for an offer or source code. Numeric, 13 positions with a 2-place decimal; required.
From SCF	The lowest SCF in the series to be eligible for the override. You can use this field and the next to restrict qualifying orders by geographical location. If only one SCF is eligible, you would enter it in both the From and To SCF fields. SCF codes are defined in and validated against the SCF Code table. See Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
To SCF	The highest SCF in the series to be eligible for the override. The system does not validate that every SCF between the From and To SCF you enter exists. For example, if you enter 011 in the From SCF field and 020 in the To SCF field, the system accepts this range even if 019 is not a valid SCF in your company. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required if you enter a From SCF.
Ship via	The code representing the shipper to use on qualifying orders. Ship vias are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; required.

Copy Offer Ship Via Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to copy the ship via overrides from one offer or source code to a different offer or source code. You can copy overrides only to a source code or offer that currently does not have any ship via override information set up.

How to display this screen: Select Copy at the Work with Offer Ship Via Screen.

How to complete this screen: Each field on the Copy Offer Ship Via screen has been described at the Create Offer Ship Via Screen (Creating a Ship Via Override). To complete this screen and copy ship via override information:

1. Enter the offer or source code to use as the source of information in the Copy from area of the screen. You can specify only one source of information, either an offer or a source code
2. Enter each offer or source code to use as the target of information in the Copy to area of the screen. You can enter as many targets as you like, and there is no restriction on copying an offer to source codes or vice versa.
3. The system validates your entries and highlights any fields you need to correct. If any of the “to” offers or source codes currently have ship via overrides set up, the screen displays an error message. Correct any fields as necessary; or select Exit to exit the screen.
4. Select Accept to submit the copy. The Confirm Accept pop-up window displays; confirm the copy, or cancel it.
5. The system submits the job OFR_SVAC. This job copies each ship via override for the “from” offer or source to the “to” offers or sources.

Working with Lines of Business (WLOB)

Lines of business represent clients, or business units, in Order Management System. Each line of business contains assignments that represent a specific entity, division, or offer, or a combination of these three values.

When an operator enters an order in order entry the system assigns each ship to customer to a line of business based on the entity, division, and offer associated with the order. The system uses the source code defined on the order header to determine which line of business to assign to an order based on the assignments defined for the line of business.

The system uses the line of business associated with each order to group all orders that contain a specific line of business together. You can then generate pick slips for the orders by line of business.

The system uses the following hierarchy to assign a line of business to an order ship to in order entry:

• the entity, division, and offer associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the offer and division associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the offer and entity associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the division and entity associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the offer associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the division associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business
• the entity associated with the source code on the order header matches a specific line of business

Selecting the line of business for an order: The system uses the source code on the order header to determine the related division and offer. The related entity is determined based on the division associated with the source code on the order header.

Line of business order queue: You can review shippable orders based on the line of business assigned to each order. The system further defines orders assigned to a specific line of business by:

• orders containing one reserved and unprinted open order line
• orders containing more than one reserved and unprinted open order line
• whether the order includes a bulk item
• whether the order includes a gift-wrapped item
• the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header

Note:

You must select Update Statistics in Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ) or submit the LOBSTATS periodic function to view the most current line of business order queue.

For more information:

• reviewing the line of business order queue for each line of business and generating pick slips by line of business, gift wrap orders, bulk orders, or ship via priority: Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ)
• processing credits by line of business and dollar amount: Processing Credits by Line of Business (MCLB)

In this topic:

• Work with Line of Business Screen
  • Create Line of Business Screen
  • Display Line of Business Screen (Displaying Line of Business Order Queue)
• Work with Line of Business Assignment Screen
  • Create Line of Business Assignment Screen

Work with Line of Business Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WLOB in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Line of Business from a menu.

Field	Description
LOB code (Line of business code)	A code that represents a line of business. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Description	A description of the line of business code. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Change a line of business description	Select Change for a line of business to advance to the Change Line of Business screen. At this screen, you can change the line of business description only. See Create Line of Business Screen for a description of the fields on this screen.
Delete a line of business	Select Delete for a line of business to delete it. Note: The following error message indicates if you try to delete a line of business that is assigned to an open order: Cannot delete LOB, Order Exists
Display a line of business order queue	Select Display for a line of business to advance to the Display Line of Business Screen (Displaying Line of Business Order Queue).
Work with line of business assignment	Select Assignments for a line of business to advance to the Work with Line of Business Assignment Screen.
Create a line of business code	Select Create to advance to the Create Line of Business Screen.

Create Line of Business Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a line of business code.

How to display this screen: On the Work with Line of Business Screen, select Create.

Field	Description
Line of business	A code that represents a line of business. Note: The system cannot assign a line of business to an order unless at least one line of business assignment exists for the line of business code. See Work with Line of Business Assignment Screen. Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Line of business description	A description of the line of business. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; required.

Completing this screen: You advance to the Create Line of Business Assignment Screen, where you can create an assignment for the line of business you just created.

Display Line of Business Screen (Displaying Line of Business Order Queue)

Purpose: Use this screen to review the line of business order queue. You can use the line of business order queue to review statistics for orders that are associated with a specific line of business, such as:

• the total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted open order line
• the total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line
• the number of single line and multiple line gift wrap orders
• the number of single line and multiple line bulk orders
• the number of orders for each ship via priority

Note:

You must select Update Statistics in Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ) or submit the LOBSTATS periodic function to view the most current line of business order queue.

How to display this screen: On the Work with Line of Business Screen, select Display for a line of business.

Field	Description
LOB (Line of business code)	The code representing the line of business you are reviewing. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Description	The description of the line of business you are reviewing. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.
Last update	The date and time the information on this screen was last updated. You can update the line of business order queue by selecting Update Statistics in Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ) or by submitting the LOBSTATS periodic function. Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only.
Single total orders	The total number of orders that have only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status for a specific line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Multi total orders	The total number of orders that have more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status for a specific line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Single gift wrap orders	The total number of gift wrap orders that have one reserved and unprinted line in an open status for a specific line of business. This line must represent a gift wrap line (the Gift wrap field for this item is selected). Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi gift wrap orders	The total number of gift wrap orders that have more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status for a specific line of business. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single bulk orders	The total number of bulk orders that have only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status for a specific line of business. This line must represent a bulk item (the Oversize field for the item is selected). Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi bulk orders	The total number of bulk orders that have more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status, where one of the lines is for a bulk item, for a specific line of business. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 1	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 1 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 1	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 1 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 2	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 2 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 2	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 2 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 3	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 3 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 3	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 3 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 4	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 4 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 4	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 4 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 5	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 5 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 5	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 5 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 6	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 6 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 6	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 6 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 7	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 7 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 7	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 7 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 8	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 8 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 8	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 8 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Single ship via priority 9	The total number of orders that contain only one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 9 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Multi ship via priority 9	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted line in an open status that is also defined as ship via priority 9 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Work with Line of Business Assignment Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to set up the assignment combinations that will identify a particular line of business.

Line of business assignments represent the entity, division, or offer, or combination of these three values assigned to a line of business. The assignment determines which line of business the system assigns to an order in order entry. The system uses a line of business assignment to group all orders associated with a specific line of business together.

Note:

The system cannot assign a line of business to an order unless there is at least one line of business assignment for the line of business code.

How to display this screen: On the Work with Line of Business Screen, select Assignments for a line of business.

Field	Description
LOB (Line of business code)	The line of business code for which you are working with the line of business assignments. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Description	The line of business description for which you are working with the line of business assignments. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.
Entity	A code that represents an entity. Entities can represent the business units within your company (for example, mail order, retail, wholesale). Every sale, return, exchange, discount, and write-off is attributed to an entity. Entities should represent any organization within your company that is held accountable for sales performance. See Working with Entities (WENT). Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Division	A code representing a division of your business. Divisions can represent groups within business units (for example, winter, spring, summer, fall, and holiday). See Working with Divisions (WDIV). Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Offer	A code representing a catalog, space, or advertisement used to present merchandise to your customers. See Working with Offers (WOFR). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Screen Option	Procedure
Change a line of business assignment	Select Change for a line of business assignment to advance to the Change Line of Business Assignment screen. You can change any information on this screen. See Create Line of Business Assignment Screen for a description of the fields on this screen.
Delete a line of business assignment	Select Delete for a line of business assignment to delete it.
Display a line of business assignment	Select Display for a line of business assignment to advance to the Display Line of Business Assignment screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Line of Business Assignment Screen for a description of the fields on this screen.
Create a line of business assignment	Select Create to advance to the Create Line of Business Assignment Screen.

Create Line of Business Assignment Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create an assignment for a specific line of business. Each assignment you create must be unique across all lines of business or the screen displays an error message similar to the following:

Combination of Ent/Div/Off Exists for LOB (4) (LOB 555)

How to display this screen: On the Work with Line of Business Assignment Screen, select Create. The system automatically advances you to this screen when you complete the Create Line of Business Screen.

Field	Description
LOB (Line of business code)	The line of business code for which you are creating an assignment. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Description	The line of business description for which you are creating an assignment. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.
Entity	A code that represents an entity. Entities can represent the business units within your company (for example, mail order, retail, wholesale). Every sale, return, exchange, discount, and write-off is attributed to an entity. Entities should represent any organization within your company that is held accountable for sales performance. Entity codes are defined in and validated against the Entity table. See Working with Entities (WENT). The following message displays if you enter an invalid entity in this field: Entity does not exist. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.
Division	A code representing a division of your business. Divisions can represent groups within business units (for example, winter, spring, summer, fall, and holiday). Division codes are defined in and validated against the Division table. See Working with Divisions (WDIV). The following message displays if you enter an invalid division code in this field: Division does not exist. The following message displays if you enter a division that does not relate to the entity you defined: Division does not belong to the above Entity. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; optional.
Offer	A code representing a catalog, space, or advertisement used to present merchandise to your customers. Offer codes are defined in and validated against the Offer table. See Working with Offers (WOFR). The following message displays if you enter an invalid offer code in this field: Offer does not exist. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.

Displaying the Line of Business Order Queue Summary (DLOQ)

Purpose: Use the Display Line of Business Order Queue Summary to review statistics for orders that are associated with a line of business.

You can use the line of business order queue summary to review orders ready for shipment by line of business and then generate pick slips for the orders.

Note:

The number of orders displayed in the line of business order queue does not directly match the number of pick tickets the system can produce during pick slip generation.

Across all lines of business, the system provides a total of the number of orders that contain:

• only one reserved and unprinted open order line
• more than one reserved and unprinted open order line

For each line of business, the system also provides a total of the number of orders that contain:

• only one reserved and unprinted open order line
• more than one reserved and unprinted open order line

The system then breaks the total of the single and multiple line orders into buckets:

• gift wrap orders (the system defines a gift wrap order as an order that includes an item with the Gift wrap field selected).
• bulk orders (the system defines a bulk order as an order that includes an item with the Oversized field selected).
• ship via priority 1-9 (the system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order).

For more information: See Working with Lines of Business (WLOB), for more information on how to create a line of business and how the system assigns a line of business to an order.

In this topic:

• Line of Business Order Queue Summary Screen
• Updating the Line of Business Order Queue Statistics

Line of Business Order Queue Summary Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to review the statistics for each line of business.

Note:

The information on this screen is only as current as the last time the LOBSTAT batch program was run. See Updating the Line of Business Order Queue Statistics.

How to display this screen: Enter DLOQ in the Fast path field at the top of any menu, or select Display LOB Order Queue Summary from a menu.

Field	Description
Last update	The date and time when the system last refreshed the information on this screen. The system refreshes the information on this screen when you select Update Statistics to submit the LOB_STATS batch job or when you execute the LOBSTAT periodic function. See Updating the Line of Business Order Queue Statistics. Date: Numeric, 6 positions (in user date format); display-only. Time: Numeric, 6 positions (HHMMSS format); display-only.
Total single line orders	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line across all lines of business. This number represents the total of all single line total order buckets for each line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Total multi line orders	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line across all lines of business. This number represents the total of all multiple line total order buckets for each line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
LOB	The code and description of a line of business. Line of business codes are defined in and validated against the Line of Business table. See Working with Lines of Business (WLOB). LOB code: Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only. LOB description: Alphanumeric, 40 positions; display-only.
Total ord singl (Total number of single line orders)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line for a specific line of business. This number represents the total of all single line ship via priority buckets for this line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
G/W ord singl (Number of single line gift wrap orders)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as gift wrap (the Gift wrap field on the order detail line is selected) for a specific line of business. Note: The system includes each single line gift wrap order in a single line ship via priority bucket, based on the ship via priority for each order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Bulk ord singl (Number of single line bulk orders)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as bulk (the Oversized field for the item is selected) for a specific line of business. Note: The system includes each single line bulk order in a single line ship via priority bucket, based on the ship via priority for each order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 1 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 1)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 1 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 2 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 2)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 2 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 3 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 3)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 3 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 4 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 4)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 4 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 5 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 5)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 5 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 6 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 6)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 6 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 7 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 7)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 7 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 8 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 8)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 8 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 9 (Number of single line orders defined as ship via single priority 9)	The total number of orders that contain one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 9 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Note: Ship via priority 9 represents rush orders. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Total ord multi (Total number of multiple line orders)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line for a specific line of business. This number represents the total of all multiple line ship via priority buckets for this line of business. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
G/W ord multi (Number of multiple line gift wrap orders)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that also includes an order line defined as gift wrap (the Gift wrap field on the order detail line is selected) for a specific line of business. Note: The system includes each single line gift wrap order in a single line ship via priority bucket, based on the ship via priority for each order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Bulk ord multi (Number of multiple line bulk orders)	The total number of orders that include more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that also include an order line defined as bulk (the Oversized field for the item is selected) for a specific line of business. Note: The system includes each single line gift wrap order in a single line ship via priority bucket, based on the ship via priority for each order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 1 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 1)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 1 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 2 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 2)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 2 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 3 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 3)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 3 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 4 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 4)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 4 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 5 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 5)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 5 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 6 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 6)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 6 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 7 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 7)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 7 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 8 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 8)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 8 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.
Ship via priority 9 (Number of multiple line orders defined as ship multi via priority 9)	The total number of orders that contain more than one reserved and unprinted open order line that is also defined as ship via priority 9 for a specific line of business. The system uses the ship via priority defined for the ship via on the order header to determine the ship via priority for the order. Note: Ship via priority 9 represents rush orders. Numeric, 5 positions; display-only.

Updating the Line of Business Order Queue Statistics

You can update the information on the Line of Business Order Queue Summary Screen and on the Display Line of Business Screen (Displaying Line of Business Order Queue) by selecting Update Statistics.

Note:

You can also process this batch program by running the PFR0034 periodic function.

The LOBSTAT batch program uses the following steps to update the information in the line of business order queue:

1. The system identifies all open orders that reference a line of business and updates the statistics for each line of business alphanumerically.

2. The system determines which of the open orders that contain a line of business are single line orders (the order includes only one open, reserved, and unprinted line). For each single line order, the system:

   • identifies the ship via priority using the ship via defined on the order header and updates the ship via priority buckets with the results.
   • adds up the quantity in each single line ship via priority bucket and defaults the total in the single line total orders bucket.
   • identifies all single line orders that contain a gift wrap item (the Gift wrap field for the line is selected).
   • defaults the total number of single line orders that contain a gift wrap item in the single line gift wrap orders bucket.
   • identifies all single line orders that contain a bulk item (the Oversized field for the item is selected).
   • defaults the total number of single line orders that contain a bulk item to the single line bulk orders bucket.

3. The system determines which of the open orders that contain a line of business are multiple line orders (the order includes more than one open, reserved, and unprinted line). For each multiple line order, the system:

   • identifies the ship via priority, using the ship via defined on the order header and updates the ship via priority buckets with the results.
   • adds up the quantity in each multiple line ship via priority bucket and defaults the total in the multiple line total orders bucket.
   • identifies all multiple line orders that contain a gift wrap item (the Gift wrap field for one or more of the lines on the order is selected).
   • defaults the total number of multiple line orders that contain a gift wrap item in the multiple line gift wrap orders bucket.
   • identifies all multiple line orders that contain a bulk item (the Oversized field for one or more of the items on the order is selected).
   • defaults the total number of multiple line orders that contain a bulk item to the multiple line bulk orders bucket.

4. The system performs the same steps to the next line of business in alphanumeric order.

5. The system updates the Last update date and Last update time fields with the date and time this batch program was performed.

Note:

When you submit the LOBSTAT batch program, the system checks to see if an active procedure for the company you are currently in is present. If an active procedure is present, the system displays the error message:

Cannot Run The Submit Job.

You must wait until the batch job currently running has completed before submitting another batch job.

Screen Option	Procedure
Select the criteria you wish to use to generate a pick slip	Select Select Picks to advance to the Work with Streamlined Pick Slip Generation Screen.
Update statistics on this screen	Select Update Statistics to submit the LOBSTAT batch program that updates the information on this screen and on the Display Line of Business Screen (Displaying Line of Business Order Queue).

Creating SCF Ship Vias by SCF Range (MSSV)

Purpose: Use this menu option to create SCF ship via information for a selected SCF range, rather then entering this information for each SCF or drop point.

A Sectional Center Facility (SCF) code represents the first 3 digits of the destination postal code. A Ship Via code is used to indicate the areas (postal codes) where shippers deliver merchandise.

The system uses this information in order entry and order maintenance to ensure that the shipper assigned to the order can deliver to the shipping address on the order. You must create a record for every valid Ship Via/SCF combination. If a record does not exist for the ship via on an order and the SCF of the shipping address, order entry displays an error message: Ship via is not valid with ship to zip code.

You can also create SCF/ship via information using the following menu options:

• Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV)
• Editing SCF Ship Via (ESSV)

Create SCF Ship Vias by SCF Range Screen

Use this screen to create SCF ship via information for a selected SCF range.

To create:

1. Enter valid information in the Country, SCF code range, Ship via code, Drop point, Shipping zone, and optionally, Shipping lead days fields.
2. Select Accept. The system submits a job to create an SCF ship via value for each SCF in the range you defined.

You can review the SCF ship via information in the Working with SCF/Ship Via Values (WSHV) menu option.

How to display this screen: Enter MSSV in the Fast path field or select Create SCF Ship Via by SCF Range from a menu.

Field	Description
Country	The country where the SCF is located. Country codes are defined in and validated against the Country table; see Setting Up the Country Table (WCTY). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
SCF code range	The range of SCF codes for which you wish to create SCF ship via values. An SCF code represents the first 3 positions of the destination postal code. SCF codes are defined in and validated against the SCF table; see Working with SCF Codes (WSCF). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; required.
Ship via code	The shipper to deliver merchandise to the customer, such as 01 (UPS). Ship via codes are defined in and validated against the Ship Via table; see Working with Ship Via Codes (WVIA). Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Drop point	A code that represents one of your shipping warehouses or a central location to which merchandise will be shipped for consolidation. Drop points are used in zone skipping, which enables you to ship a carton by one carrier to a drop point, where another carrier picks up the carton and delivers it to its final destination. Note: If you are using the freight by order weight freight method, the drop point you define here must match the drop point you define in the Warehouse table. See Working with Weight Tables for Order Weight (WFTB). Numeric, 3 positions; required.
Shipping zone	The zone within the country where the carton is being shipped in relation to the drop point. Shipping zones are sections of the country that are defined by UPS. See About Zones. Numeric, 2 positions; required.
Shipping lead days	The number of days it takes the shipper to deliver merchandise to this SCF. Calculation for pick slip preparation: The system checks the arrival date for each line on an order to determine when to create a pre-generated pick. Arrival Date from Order Line (or Order Ship To) - (Pick Processing Days (B37) + Ship Via Lead Days in WSHV) < or = Today's Date The system creates a pre-generated pick for the order line if this system-calculated date is less than or equal to today's date; otherwise, the system does not create a pre-generated pick for the order line until the date is within the allotted time frame. See Selecting Order Lines for Pick Slip Preparation for additional details. Calculation for Alternate Shipping Charges by Via window: The system also uses this setting to calculate the Ship lead days and Expected delivery date to display at the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window in order entry, and this window uses a different calculation than the one described above. See the description of the Alternate Shipping Charges by Via Window for more information. Numeric, 3 positions; optional.

Shipping Zone Reservation

Topics in this part:

• Shipping Zone Reservation Overview provides a brief overview of the shipping zone reservation process, and provides a flow chart of the process of order entry for zone reservation items.
• Creating and Maintaining Geographic Zones (WGZN) describes how to set up and maintain geographic zones using zip codes or SCF codes.
• Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Codes (WZRC) shows you how to set up and maintain the zone reservation codes that will be assigned to weather-sensitive items to insure that they will ship at an optimal time for planting in the regions to which they are going.
• Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Dates (WZRD) describes zone reservation date windows and shows you how to set up and maintain zone reservation dates.

Creating and Maintaining Geographic Zones (WGZN)

Purpose: Use this menu option to create, change, delete, or display geographic zone information.

Use of geographic zones: Geographic zones are regions of the country which relate to relative weather conditions. Geographic zones are used by the zone reservation process to restrict shipping of weather-sensitive inventory such as plant stock. Each geographic zone will have a different date window during which particular kinds of stock can be shipped. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview.

In this topic:

• Work with Geographic Zones Screen
  • Create Geographic Zones Screen

Work with Geographic Zones Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WGZN in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Geographic Zones from a menu.

Field	Description
Geographic zone	A code that identifies the geographic zone. Alphanumeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Description	A description of the geographic zone. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a geographic zone	Select Create to advance to the Create Geographic Zones Screen.
Change a geographic zone description	Select Change for a geographic zone to advance to the Change Geographic Zones screen. At this screen, you can change the description of the geographic zone. See Create Geographic Zones Screen for field descriptions.
Delete a geographic zone	Select Delete for a geographic zone to delete it.
Display a geographic zone description	Select Display for a geographic zone to advance to the Display Geographic Zones screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Geographic Zones Screen for field descriptions.

Create Geographic Zones Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a geographic zone.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Geographic Zones Screen.

Field	Description
Geographic zone code	A code that identifies the geographic zone. Geographic zones are used to divide the country into shipping regions for the purpose of restricting the shipment of climate-sensitive plant stock. Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	A description of the geographic zone. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Dates (WZRD)

Purpose: Use the Work with Zone Reservation Dates menu option to create, change, delete, or display shipping zone date windows for each category of zone reservation coded items you have defined using Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Codes (WZRC).

About zone reservation dates: Zone reservation dates are the time windows you set up for shipping weather-sensitive inventory to different geographic zones in the country. For each zone reservation code, which identifies a category of weather-sensitive inventory stock such as bulbs, bare root plants, or potted plants, you specify the season in which it will be sold, then define a set of zone date windows corresponding to the geographic zones of the country. For example, potted plants would have a zone date window for each geographic zone in the country.

Each zone date window defines the following dates:

• Start date: the date you start shipping an item with this code.
• Deferred cutoff date: the backorder cutoff date. On or after this date you will not take orders for this item if the item is not available in your warehouse.

Note:

The Deferred cutoff date is not considered if you use alternate zone reservation rules, as controlled by the Use Alternate Zone Reservation Logic (I52) system control value. See Alternate Zone Reservation Rules for a discussion.

• Cutoff date: the cutoff date for taking orders, whether or not stock is available in your warehouse.
• End date: the last date for shipping the item.
• Next season open date: the start date of the next season for items with this code.

About season dates: Some zone reservation coded items may be sold in more than one season. You must set up a group of zone date windows for each season in which you plan to ship items with this zone reservation code. For example, a bare root plant from a spring catalog may have 10 zone date windows, corresponding to 10 geographic zones you have set up for the country. The same bare root plant offered in a fall catalog would have a different set of 10 zone date windows corresponding to the same 10 geographic zones.

For more information: See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview for an explanation of the zone reservation process.

In this topic:

• Work with Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Zone Date Windows)
  • Create Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Creating a Zone Date Window)

Work with Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Zone Date Windows)

Purpose: Use this screen to change, delete, display, or create information about the zone reservation date windows associated with each zone reservation code and season.

How to display this screen: Enter WZRD in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Zone Reservation Dates from a menu.

Field	Description
Zone reservation	The zone reservation code. A code that identifies a type of weather-sensitive inventory item for which you have set up shipping restrictions by zone. See Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Codes (WZRC) for information on setting up and maintaining zone reservation codes. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; optional.
Season	A code which identifies the season to which the date window applies. See Working with Season Codes (WSEA). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Geo. zone (Geographic zone)	A code which identifies the geographic zone to which the date window applies. See Creating and Maintaining Geographic Zones (WGZN). Alphanumeric, 3 positions; optional.
Start date	The shipping start date for the zone date window. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; display-only.
End date	The shipping end date for the zone window. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a zone reservation date window	Select Create to advance to the Create Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Creating a Zone Date Window).
Change a zone reservation date window	Select Change for a zone reservation date window to advance to the Change Zone Reservation Dates screen. You can change any information except the zone reservation code, the season, and the geographic zone of the date window. See Create Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Creating a Zone Date Window) for field descriptions.
Delete a zone reservation date window	Select Delete for a zone reservation date window to delete it.
Display a zone reservation date window	Select Display for a zone reservation date window to advance to the Display Zone Reservation Dates screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Creating a Zone Date Window) for field descriptions.

Create Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Creating a Zone Date Window)

Purpose: Use this screen to define the Start date, Deferred cutoff date, Cutoff date, End date, and Next season open dates for a zone reservation date window.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Zone Reservation Dates Screen (Zone Date Windows).

Field	Description
Zone reservation	A code that identifies a type of weather-sensitive inventory item such as bare root plants, or hardy bulbs. Zone reservation codes are defined in and validated against the Zone Reservation Code table, and assigned in the Item table. See Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Codes (WZRC). Alphanumeric, 4 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Season	A code which identifies the season to which the zone reservation date window applies. See Working with Season Codes (WSEA) for information on defining seasons. Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Geographic zone	A code which identifies the geographic zone to which the date window applies. See Creating and Maintaining Geographic Zones (WGZN). Alphanumeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	A description of the zone date window. Alphanumeric, 40 positions; required.
Start date	The zone window start date, which is the date you plan to start shipping items tied to this zone date window. If using Standard Zone Reservation Rules: For order lines taken prior to the season start date as well as prior to the zone window start date, the zone window Start date is set as the Arrival date for the order line, and the order line has a backorder status of Future order. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview for information about Season dates and future orders. For order types flagged to display Zone Date Windows, if an item tied to this zone date window is ordered before the zone window start date, the Display Zone Reservation Dates Window displays shipping start date information. If using Alternate Zone Reservation Rules: For order lines taken prior to the season start date as well as prior to the zone window start date, provided there is an available quantity or open PO quantity for the item: the zone window Start date is set as the Arrival date for the order line, and the order line has a backorder status of Future order. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview for information about Season dates and future orders. for order types flagged to display Zone Date Windows, if an item tied to this zone date window is ordered before the zone window start date, the Display Zone Reservation Dates Window displays shipping start date information. For order lines taken prior to the season start date as well as prior to the zone window start date, if there is no available quantity or open PO quantity for the item, the Select Order Line Option Window provides the choice to either sell out the order line, or take the order line as a future order with the zone window's Next season open date as the order line's Arrival date. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; required.
Deferred cutoff date (Backorder cutoff date)	On or after this date, backorders for items tied to this zone window will not be taken if you are using Standard Zone Reservation Rules. Under these rules: if stock is available for an order tied to this zone window, orders taken on or after this date, but prior to the cutoff date, will be created with a backorder status of Zone Reservation, and will be reserved and shipped during pick generation. if stock is unavailable for an item ordered on or after this date, the Select Order Line Option Window allows the operator to either sell out the order line, or take the order line as a future order with the zone window's Next season open date as the order line's Arrival date. Note: This date is not considered as part of Alternate Zone Reservation Rules, This date cannot be prior to the start date. If you enter a date in this field which is prior to the start date, the screen displays the following error message: Deferred cutoff date cannot be prior to the start date . Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; required.
Cutoff date	On or after this date, new orders will not be taken for items tied to this zone window, regardless of item availability. The Select Order Line Option Window provides the choice to either sell out the order line, or take the order line as a future order with the zone window's Next season open date as the order line's Arrival date. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview. This date cannot be prior to the deferred cutoff date. If you enter a date in this field which is prior to the deferred cutoff date, the screen displays the following error message when you select OK: Cutoff date cannot be prior to deferred cutoff date. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; required.
End date	The last date of the zone date shipping window; the date you plan to stop shipping items tied to this zone date window. This date cannot be prior to the Cutoff date. If you enter a date in this field which is prior to the cutoff date, the screen displays the following error message when you select OK: End date cannot be prior to cutoff date. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; required.
Next season open date	The open date of the next season for items tied to this zone date window. This is the date displayed at the Select Order Line Option Window and loaded as the Arrival date for the order line if the order line is taken as a future order. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview. This date cannot be prior to the End date. If you enter a date in this field which is prior to the End date, the screen displays the following error message when you select OK: Next season open date cannot be prior to the current end date. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format; required.

Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Codes (WZRC)

Purpose: Use this menu option to create, change, delete, or display zone reservation code information.

Use of zone reservation codes: Zone reservation codes are used to identify weather-sensitive inventory, such as plant stock, for which you want to restrict shipping dates. Plant stock such as bulbs, bare root plants, or potted plants can be assigned zone reservation codes that will identify the date windows for shipping them to different regions of the country. Each zone reservation code will have a different set of restrictions. For example, hardy bulbs may have a longer shipping window than bare root plants. In this case, you would assign a different zone reservation code to hardy bulbs than to bare root plants. For each zone reservation code, you can set up date windows to restrict shipping to each geographic zone in the country. See Shipping Zone Reservation Overview, for a summary of the zone reservation process.

When do shipping zone reservation rules apply? Zone reservation processing requires the following information in order to process an order line under zone reservation rules:

• The item/SKU must be assigned a Zone reservation code to identify it as a zone reservation item.
• The offer associated with the order must be linked to a Season.
• The shipping address must be assigned to a geographic zone. The system uses zip codes or SCF codes to identify geographic zones. See Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) for more information on zip codes and geographic zones. See Working with SCF Codes (WSCF), for more information on SCF codes and geographic zones.
• For each zone reservation code, you must define zone reservation date windows for all geographic zones in the country. See Creating and Maintaining Zone Reservation Dates (WZRD).

In this topic:

• Work with Zone Reservations Screen
• Create Zone Reservation Screen (Creating a Zone Reservation Code)

Work with Zone Reservations Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WZRC in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Zone Reservation Codes from a menu.

Field	Description
Zone reservation	A code that identifies a type of climate-sensitive inventory item for which you want to set up shipping restrictions by zone. Alphanumeric, 4 positions; display-only.
Description	A description of the zone reservation code. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a zone reservation code	Select Create to advance to the Create Zone Reservation Screen (Creating a Zone Reservation Code).
Change a zone reservation code description	Select Change for a zone reservation code to advance to the Change Zone Reservation screen. At this screen, you can change the description of the zone reservation code. See Create Zone Reservation Screen (Creating a Zone Reservation Code) for field descriptions.
Delete a zone reservation code	Select Delete for a zone reservation code to delete it.
Display a zone reservation code	Select Display for a zone reservation code to advance to the Display Zone Reservation screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See Create Zone Reservation Screen (Creating a Zone Reservation Code) for field descriptions.

Create Zone Reservation Screen (Creating a Zone Reservation Code)

Purpose: Use this screen to create a zone reservation code.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Zone Reservations Screen.

Field	Description
Zone reservation	The zone reservation code. This code identifies a category of climate-sensitive inventory items for which you set up shipping restrictions by zone. Alphanumeric, 4 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	The description of the zone reservation code. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Order Broker Drop Ship Integration

Chapters in this part: The following options are related to integration with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager module.

• Interface with Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment Module: Overview and Setup describes the setup required for integration with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager module.
• Supplier Direct Fulfillment Processing provides details on process flows and the communication between Order Management System and Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager.
• Downloading Drop Ship Vendors (ECSV) explains how to download initial vendor information for vendors using the Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager.
• Working with Retail Brands (WRBD) explains how to create and maintain retail brands for use with the Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager.
• Displaying Unprocessed Drop Ship Items (DUDS) describes the menu option you use to review all unprocessed drop ship items, including items fulfilled through integration with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager.
• Printing Drop Ship Reports (PDSR) describes the reports you can use to print information related to orders fulfilled through integration with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager.
• Working with Drop Ship Background Jobs (WPBJ) describes how to start, stop, and troubleshoot the CDC async job.
• Working with Drop Ship Errors (WDSE) describes the screen you use to review or delete records which went into error status when they were transferred between Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager and Order Management System.

Downloading Drop Ship Vendors (ECSV)

Purpose: Use this menu option to send vendors to Order Broker for drop ship fulfillment.

In this topic:

• Downloading Vendors to Order Broker
• Download Drop Ship Vendors Screen

Downloading Vendors to Order Broker

This option sends new or updated vendor information to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module through the CreateDSVendor message. Only vendors whose Drop ship output field on the Second Create Vendor Screen is set to OROB Drop Shipping are eligible to be sent to Order Broker.

The information sent to Order Broker includes:

• vendor code and description
• contact name and email address
• vendor address

Afterward, you can use the Order Broker screens to set vendor preferences, change carrier assignments, and set up vendor users.

Order Broker creates each new vendor in active status, and automatically assigns the vendor to all active carriers.

Other ways to create vendors in Oracle Retail Order Broker: You can create a new vendor in the Order Broker database by using the Create Vendor screen. You can also create a vendor by sending a purchase order for the vendor; however, when you create a new vendor this way, the only information sent from Order Management System about the vendor is the vendor code, name, and email address. You will need to complete the remaining setup for the vendor through the Order Broker Edit Vendor screen.

Transferred vendor information: The vendor information transferred to Order Broker through this menu option is from the Vendor table, with the exception of Vendor e-mail address, which is from in the Vendor Contact Table.

Updating an existing vendor: If the vendor record already exists in Order Broker and you or the vendor have updated the record there, processing the vendor download overwrites the existing information in Order Broker.

For more information: See the Order Broker Operations Guide for more information on the contents of the CreateDSVendor message, and see the Order Broker online help for more information on completing vendor setup in Order Broker.

Download Drop Ship Vendors Screen

How to display this screen: Enter ECSV in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Download Drop Ship Vendors from a menu.

Screen Option	Procedure
Send vendor information to Order Broker	Select Submit to submit the batch job which transfers vendor information to Order Broker.

Displaying Unprocessed Drop Ship Items (DUDS)

Purpose: Use this menu option to review all of the drop ship order detail lines that have been entered but not yet processed through the Selecting Vendors for Drop Ship Processing (MDSP) menu option, including drop ship orders which you will process automatically using the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration.

Quotes: Drop ship items on quotes are not included in this menu option; see Entering Pre-Order Quotes for an overview and required setup.

Reviewing special handling instructions: This menu option allows you to review the special handling instructions associated with a drop ship item before you send the drop ship purchase order or pick slip to the vendor, and to access Order Maintenance, if you have secured feature authority to order maintenance. Additionally, when you advance to the Display Special Handling Screen or Display Custom Special Handling Screen using this menu option, you can access Order Maintenance to change the special handling instructions, if you have secured feature authority to order maintenance. See Working with User Records (WUSR) for information about user authority.

Note:

Drop ship order lines can be processed as drop ship pick slips, or drop ship purchase orders. Drop ship purchase orders, including drop ship purchase orders processed through Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module support only custom special handling, not free-form special handling.

Display Unprocessed Drop Ship Items Screen

How to display this screen: Enter DUDS in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Display Unprocessed Drop Ship Items from a menu.

Field	Description
Item	The code you use to identify the item. Items are validated against the Item table. Alphanumeric, 12 positions; display-only.
SKU	The code that further identifies the item. SKUs are validated against the SKU table. Alphanumeric, three 4-position fields; display-only.
Description	A description of the item (not the SKU). Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.
Order # - Ship-to #	The order number and ship-to suffix number of the drop ship item. Order number: 8 positions, numeric; display-only. Ship-to number: 3 positions; numeric; display-only.
Vendor #	The code which identifies the vendor for the drop ship item. Vendor codes are defined in and validated against the Vendor table. See Working with Vendors (WVEN). Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
SH (Special Handling)	The special handling code associated with the drop ship item. Not displayed if no special handling is associated with the item. Special handling codes are defined in and validated against the Additional Charges table. See Work with Additional Charges Screen. Alphanumeric, 2 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Update the order	Select Maintenance for a drop ship item to advance to the Work with Order Screen in Order Maintenance. In order to access this screen, you must have secured feature authority to order maintenance. See Working with User Records (WUSR) for information about user authority.
Review order details	Select Display for a drop ship item to advance to the Display Order Detail Screen (Reviewing Order Line Detail).
Review special handling information	Select Special Handling for a drop ship item to advance to the Display Special Handling Screen or the Display Custom Special Handling Screen, if the item is associated with standard or custom special handling. When you advance to the Display Custom Special Handling screen or the Display Special Handling screen from this screen, you will be able to select the option to access Order Maintenance, if you have authority to Order Maintenance. See Working with User Records (WUSR) for information about user authority. If you Select Special Handling for a drop ship item that does not require special handling, the following message will display: The selected line has no special handling instructions.

Working with Retail Brands (WRBD)

Purpose: Use this menu option to create, change, delete, or display retail brand (retail division) information used by the integration with Order Broker’s Drop Ship Manager module for internet-based drop ship processing.

Retail brands and descriptions associated with the source code on an order header are passed to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module each time purchase orders are sent. Retail brands appear on Order Broker screens as Brands.

Use in Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module: In Order Broker, you can use retail divisions to:

• Restrict the display of information to the selected brand.
• Specify a logo, packing slip messages, pack slip form, and pull sheet form.
• Enable the vendor to restrict pack slip generation to a single brand.

Required setup for Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module: In order to use Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module, you must set up one or more retail brands and associate each retail brand with at least one entity in Order Management System; however, several entities (in one or more companies) could share the same retail brand. The source code on the drop ship order must point to a division associated with one of the entities for which you have defined a retail brand.

Note:

A retail brand is not necessarily associated with a single company; one company can have several retail brands, or several companies could share the same retail brand; however the Retailer ID is specific to a company. The Retailer ID is not necessary for integration with Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module.

Work with Retail Brands Screen

How to display this screen: Enter WRBD in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with Retail Brands from a menu.

Field	Description
ID	A code that identifies the retail brand. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.
Description	A description of the retail brand. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Create a retail brand	Select Create to advance to the Create Retail Brand Screen.
Change a retail brand description	Select Change for a retail brand to advance to the Change Retail Brand screen, where you can change the description. See the Create Retail Brand Screen for more information.
Delete a retail brand	Select Delete for a retail brand to delete it.
Display a retail brand description	Select Display for a retail brand to advance to the Display Retail Brand screen. You cannot change any information on this screen. See the Create Retail Brand Screen for field descriptions.

Create Retail Brand Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to create a retail brand.

How to display this screen: Select Create on the Work with Retail Brands Screen.

Field	Description
Brand ID	A code that identifies the retail brand. See Working with Retail Brands (WRBD) for a discussion. Numeric, 3 positions. Create screen: required. Change screen: display-only.
Description	A description of the retail brand. Alphanumeric, 30 positions; required.

Printing Drop Ship Reports (PDSR)

Purpose: Use this menu option to print one of three reports related to the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration.

Drop Ship Integration Reports Screen

How to display this screen: Enter PDSR in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Print Drop Ship Reports from a menu.

At this screen you can select any of the following reports:

• Drop Ship Integration Items on Hold from Vendor Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items with Revised Due Date Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items Pending Cancellation Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items Confirmed Cancellation Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items Sent to Integrated System Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items Pending Shipment Report
• Drop Ship Integration Items Shipped Report

Additionally, you can specify a date range for each report. Enter From and To dates in the user date format.

Periodic Process to Generate Drop Ship Reports

You can generate the first three reports through a periodic process which includes periodic functions which will generate the reports. The programs needed to create the periodic functions are:

• Drop Ship Items on Hold from Vendor: PFR0063
• Drop Ship Items with Revised Due Date: PFR0064
• Drop Ship Items Pending Cancellation: PFR0065

For more information: For information on creating periodic processes and functions, see Working with Periodic Functions (WPER).

Working with Drop Ship Background Jobs (WPBJ)

Purpose: Use this menu option to work with the CDC Async job used to process transactions between Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module and Order Management System for each company that has the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value selected.

Starting and stopping the job: If you are using the Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment integration, the CDC async job should be stopped and started each day. If the CDC async job does not have the current date, returns which are sent from Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module do show the current date. See Fulfillment (FUL) Periodic Functions under Scheduling Jobs for information on scheduling the job to start and stop on a daily basis.

Async status: The status of the async indicates whether it can process any information it receives.

• STARTED = The async is starting, but is not yet ACTIVE.
• ACTIVE = The async is up and running. In order to process information, the async must be in ACTIVE status.
• ENDING = The async is in the process of ending, but it not yet INACTIVE.
• INACTIVE = The async is not running.

When does the async look for records to process? The Delay time controls when the async looks for new records to process. This time determines the amount of time, in seconds, the async waits before looking for new records to process.

In this topic:

• Work with Drop Ship Background Jobs Screen
• Change Delay Time Screen
• Troubleshooting the CDC Async Job

Work with Drop Ship Background Jobs Screen

Use this screen to work with the CDC Async job.

How to display this screen: Enter WPBJ in the Fast path field or select Work with Drop Ship Background Jobs from a menu.

Field	Description
Job	The name of the async job. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; optional.
Status	The status of the async job. Valid status codes are: STARTED = The async is starting, but is not yet ACTIVE. ACTIVE = The async is up and running. In order to process information, the async must be in ACTIVE status. ENDING = The async is in the process of ending, but is not yet INACTIVE. INACTIVE = The async is not running. See Troubleshooting the CDC Async Job for information on correcting the status if necessary. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Start Date	The date the async was last started. Numeric, 6 positions in user date format; display-only.
Start Time	The time the async job was last started. Numeric, 6 positions; display-only.
Started By	The user ID of the person who last started the async job. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Ended By	The user ID of the person who last ended the async job. Alphanumeric, 10 positions; display-only.
Dly (Delay)	The number of seconds the async job waits for another record to process. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen Option	Procedure
Change the delay time for the async job	Select Change for the async job to advance to the Change Delay Time Screen.
Start the async job	Select Start for the async job to start it if it is inactive and not currently running on any server. Periodic function: You can also use the STRCDC periodic function to start the CDC job. If the job is currently active, or the other conditions described below under Troubleshooting are met, an error in the APP.log might indicate: IX_CDC Job not submitted - Previous job not ended. See Logs for background. Troubleshooting: In order to start the async job, either at the screen or through a periodic function: The Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value must be selected for at least one company in your Order Management System environment. The async job must be in INACTIVE status and must not actually be running on any server. There cannot be a Job History record for the IX_CDC job without an end date and time. You can review the records in the Job History table through Display Job History (DJHY). If the job does not end correctly (if, for example, the service stops while the job is running), you might need to update the Job History record in the database. There cannot be an active procedure record for the FLX0976 program. You can review and, optionally, delete active procedures through Purge Active Procedures Across Users (MACX). See Troubleshooting the CDC Async Job for more information.
End the async job	Select End for the async job to end it. Periodic function: You can also use the ENDCDC periodic function to end the CDC job. Note: You can end the async job only if it is in ACTIVE status and is actually running on any server. See Troubleshooting the CDC Async Job for more information.
Work with background jobs	Select Background Jobs to advance to the Work with Background Jobs Screen.
Work with integration layer jobs	Select Integration Layer to advance to the Work with Integration Layer Process Screen.

Change Delay Time Screen

Purpose: Use this screen to change the Delay time for the CDC async job. The Delay time is the number of seconds that the async waits before looking for new records to process.

How to display this screen: Select Change for the CDC async at the Work with Drop Ship Background Jobs Screen.

Note:

You can display this screen for the CDC async job only if the Use OROB Drop Shipping (H13) system control value is selected for at least one company in your Order Management System environment.

Troubleshooting the CDC Async Job

There may be a problem with the CDC async job if transactions sent from Order Management System to Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module, such as that new POs, are being processed, but transactions sent from Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module to Order Management System, such as PO updates, are not being processed.

To solve the problem, stop and restart the CDC async.

If the CDC async job does not end when you use the End option: If the CDC async job does not end correctly, use the JOBCLN periodic function. This periodic function updates the CDC async job as follows:

If the IX_CDC is currently running on any server, the JOBCLN function does the following:

• If the status is INACTIVE, change it to ACTIVE.
• If there is not an active procedure, create it.
• If the status is STARTED or ENDING, do not change the status.
• If the job is in END, FINISHED or MSG at the Job Management (My Jobs) screen, update it to RUN and update Job History (Display Job History (DJHY)).

If the IX_CDC job is not currently running on any server, the JOBCLN function does the following:

• If the status is ACTIVE, STARTED, OR ENDING, update it to INACTIVE.
• If there is an active procedure, delete it.
• If the job is in any status other than END and FINISHED at the Job Management screen, update it to END and update Job History.

After the JOBCLN function ends, you can restart the job.

See Using the JOBCLN Function to Resolve Job Status Across Servers for more background.

Working with Drop Ship Errors (WDSE)

Purpose: Use this menu option to review drop ship transaction records passed to or received from Order Broker’s Supplier Direct Fulfillment module that are in error in the CSF Transaction table (FLCSFT).

A drop ship transaction record received through the Order Broker Drop Ship Integration is in error status if the system cannot identify the record, for example:

• A shipment confirmation for a purchase order or purchase order line which does not exist.
• A status update such as a revised expected delivery date or a hold on a purchase order or purchase order line which does not exist.
• A return for an invalid return authorization, purchase order, or purchase order line number.

Purging Drop Ship Transaction records: You can use this menu option to delete records in error status from the CSF Transaction table (FLCSFT).

The screen sorts by date, time, type of error message, PO number, and PO sequence number. You can search for a record by entering the date and time it was created in the CSF Transaction table.

How to display this screen: Enter WDSE in the Fast path field at the top of any menu or select Work with CDC Drop Ship Errors from a menu.

Field	Description
Date	The date the record was created in the CSF Transaction table (FLCSFT). Enter a date in theDate search field to display records created on that date or later. Numeric, 6 positions, in user date format.
Time	The time the record was created in the CSF Transaction table. Enter a time in the Time search field to display records created at that time or later. Numeric, 6 positions, HH:MM:SS format.
Transaction type	The type of CSF Transaction record. Valid record types are: Drop Ship PO Confirmed Drop Ship PO Updated Cancel Request Sent Cancel Response Received Cost Change Drop Ship PO Modified (Address change) Return Update Received Return Authorization Cancelled Alphanumeric, 25 positions, display-only.
Error message	A brief description of the reason for the error. Possible error descriptions include: Order detail not shipped PODTDS record not found Invalid transaction type Invalid Vendor Item Invalid RA header Invalid RA detail RA header completed Invalid return quantity Invalid return reason RA cancel transfer failed Missing Return Disposition Receive/Confirm Error Alphanumeric, 25 positions, display-only.
PO Number	The purchase order number assigned by the system when you process drop ship purchase orders. Numeric, 7 positions; display-only.
Ln #	The purchase order detail line number. Up to 999 detail lines can be entered on a purchase order. Numeric, 3 positions; display-only.

Screen option	Procedure
Delete an error record from the CSF Transaction table (FLCSFT)	Select Delete for an error record. The record is deleted from the CSF Transaction table and no longer displayed on the screen.

Load USPS Zip Code File (LZPS)

Purpose: Use this menu option to upload city/state/zip data from the U.S. Postal Service into the City/State/Zip (postal code) table.

Overview: The City State product, available from the U.S. Postal Service, provides a comprehensive list of ZIP codes with corresponding city and county names. Updates are available on a periodic basis. Uploading this information to Order Management System provides an automated means to create records in your City/State/Zip table and keep the data in the table complete and accurate.

In this topic:

• Upload Process
• Load USPS File Screen
• Fields in the USPS Zip/City/State Table
• Fields in the Zip/City/State Table
• Troubleshooting the Zip/City/State Upload

Upload Process

1. Download the City State Product from the USPS web site.
2. When you receive the City State product:
   • If you use the File Storage API, use the putFile request message to upload the file to the OMS-IMPORTS container in the FILE_STORAGE table; otherwise,
   • If you do not use the file storage API, use the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to copy the data file to the location on your application server specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property. An example directory is /domain/conf/OMSFiles/LZIP/ctystate.txt/, where domain is the WebLogic domain directory for Order Management System. The file name matching is case-sensitive.

   Note that even if you use the file storage API, the process uses the folder specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE, so you must set up this property.

3. Use the Load USPS File Screen to submit the LZPS job, which uses the contents of the ctystate.txt data file to create records in the Zip/City/State table if these records do not already exist. The job performs the following steps:
   • Deletes any existing records in the USPS Zip/City/State work table and creates a record in this table for each eligible entry from the ctystate.txt data file. A record in the data file is eligible for upload if it is flagged with a D (detail) and is also flagged as mailable. See the Fields in the USPS Zip/City/State Table for mapping details.
   • Compares the data in the USPS Zip/City/State work table with the existing records in the Zip/City/State table. If a record in the work table does not exist in the Zip/City/State table, the job creates it.
   • If your current logging level supports it, the job uses the Application Log to track data such as the total number of records found in the data file and the total number of new records created in the.Zip/City/State table.

Note:

• The ctystate.txt data file as delivered by the U.S. Postal Service does not include delimiters between records, but the U.S. Postal Service does provide a utility to insert line breaks to make the data more readable.

  Important:

  Do not use this utility to transform the presentation of the records in the data file; if you do, the Load USPS File job will not work.
• The job does not create City/State/Zip Tax records. To create tax records at the postal code level if needed, use Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP).
• The entire process can take several minutes to a half hour to run. You can expect the job to take longer to run if you are creating records in the City/State/Zip table for the first time.
• The job deletes the file after processing it successfully.
• The job does not perform a partial update. If there are any errors, processing fails for the entire file, and the process moves the entire file in the OMS-ERRORS container of the FILE_STORAGE table if you use file storage; otherwise, the file is moved to the ERRORS subfolder of the folder specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property.

For more information: See Troubleshooting the Zip/City/State Upload.

Load USPS File Screen

Before you start: Before you advance to this screen, confirm that you have used either the File Storage API or the Work with File Uploads (WUPL) menu option to upload the file. See the Upload Process for details.

If you are not using the file storage API, when you select the LZPS menu option, make sure you are logged onto the application server specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property.

How to display this screen: Select Load USPS Zip Code FIle from a menu, or enter LZPS in the Fast path field at the top of any menu.

City State data file found? When you select this menu option, the screen indicates whether there is a data file with the correct name in the location indicated by the properties file:

Message	Explanation
***ERROR: File cannot be located.	Indicates that there is no file with the correct name in either the FILE_STORAGE table if you use the File Storage API, or the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE folder if you do not use the file storage API. See Upload Process for details. Note that file name matching is case-sensitive.
***ERROR: File is empty.	Indicates that there is a file using the correct name in the directory or container indicated, but it contains no data.
File has been found and is ready to be loaded. Click Accept to submit.	Indicates that you can proceed with the upload process. Note: This message indicates that the system has located a file with the correct name and location, based on whether the file storage API is in use, and that it contains data. It does not indicate whether the file includes postal code data or whether it is in the correct format. See Troubleshooting the Zip/City/State Upload for possible problems and steps to correct.

Completing this screen: If the file has been found and is ready to be loaded:

1. Optionally, deselect the Submit on hold option if you would like the job to run immediately; otherwise, you will need to select Release for the LZPS job at the Job Management Screen when you are ready to run it.
2. Click Accept to begin the upload process and launch the LZPS job. You might expect the job to take several minutes to a half hour to complete, depending on how many new postal code records you are loading.

Updates: See the Upload Process for an overview of the processing steps.

Fields in the USPS Zip/City/State Table

Purpose: The LZPS job reads each record in the file in the FILE_STORAGE table or specified by the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property (the City State product file from the U.S. Postal Service) that is:

• flagged with a detail code of D
• identified as mailable by a setting of N at byte 56

The job clears the previous contents of the USPS Zip/City/State work table and then writes the selected records from the City State data file into the USPS Zip/City/State work table as follows:

USPS Zip/City/State work table	City State data file from U.S. Postal Service
Copyright detail code	D
Zip code	Bytes 2-6
City state key	Bytes 7-12
City state name	Bytes 14-39 (last 3 bytes are truncated)
City st mail name ind	Byte 56
State abbrev	Bytes 100-101

The remaining fields in the USPS City/State/Zip work table are left blank.

Fields in the Zip/City/State Table

After creating the records in the USPS City/State/Zip table, the LZPS job creates new records in the City/State/Zip table if they do not already exist, mapping the data from the USPS City/State/Zip table as follows:

City/State/Zip table	Source
Zip	Zip code from USPS Zip/City/State work table
State	State abbrev from USPS Zip/City/State work table
City	City state name from USPS Zip/City/State work table
Company	The company number where you ran the LZPS job
Country	The Default Country for Customer Address (B17) in the company where you ran the LZPS job

The remaining fields in the City/State/Zip table are left blank.

Troubleshooting the Zip/City/State Upload

Question	Answer
How long does it take to upload postal codes?	It can take several minutes to a half hour to upload postal codes for the first time.
Where can I obtain the postal code data?	The U.S. Postal Service can provide the City State product, which includes a comprehensive list of ZIP codes and related cities and states.
Where does the LZPS job look for the City State data file I obtained from the U.S. Postal Service?	If you are using the File Storage API, the job looks in the OMS-IMPORTS container in the FILE_STORAGE table. Otherwise, if you are not using the file storage API, the job checks the file name and directory specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property. An example directory is /domain/conf/OMSFiles/LZIP/ctystate.txt/, where domain is the WebLogic domain directory for Order Management System.
How can I check on whether the postal codes were uploaded successfully?	If you are uploading the information for the first time, you can select the Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) option to see if records have been created. If you are performing a periodic update, you can check the application log, provided your logging level supports it; see below for more information.
What do log entries look like for a successful upload?	Sample log entries indicating a successful upload: 10:41:44,267 INFO APP - LZPS total records in delivered file = 466079 10:41:44,267 INFO APP - LZPS total detail records = 80174 10:41:44,267 INFO APP - LZPS total detail records flagged as Do Not Mail = 25035 10:41:44,267 INFO APP - LZPS total detail records flagged as Mail =55139 10:41:44,267 INFO APP - LZPS total detail records written to USPS file = 55139 Note: The total number of detail records written reflects those detail records in the data file that were eligible for selection as described in the Upload Process, and were created in the USPS City/State/Zip work file. This number might not be the same as the total number of records added to the City/State/Zip table, since the job does not add a record to the City/State/Zip table if the record already exists. The trace, app, and CWDirect log files contain entries if the upload was not successful, depending on the current logging level.
What is the importance of the total number of records noted in the application log?	total records in delivered file: the total number of records in the data file located at the file name and directory specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property or in the FILE_STORAGE table. total detail records: the total number of records in the data file flagged with a D (detail). total detail records flagged as Do Not Mail: the total number of records in the data file flagged with a D (detail) but also flagged as Do Not Mail (not mailable), and so are not eligible for selection. total detail records flagged as Mail: the total number of records in the data file flagged as mailable and that were also flagged with a D (detail). Note: Only records in the data file that are flagged with a D and are also flagged as mailable are eligible for selection. total detail records written to USPS file: the total number of records in the data file that were eligible for selection and were added to the USPS City/State/Zip work table. This total may differ from the number of records added to the City/State/Zip table, since some or all of the records written to the USPS City/State/Zip work table might already exist in the City/State/Zip table.
I uploaded the ctystate.txt file from the U.S. Postal Service. Why didn’t it create any records?	Possible explanations: The U.S. Postal Service provides a utility to add delimiters between each record in the data file and make the file more readable. If you ran this utility against the data file, the LZPS job will not be able to read any records in the file. Re-copy the data file from the CD and start the upload process again. If you have recently run an upload and are attempting to upload the same data again, there will be no new records eligible to be copied to the City/State/Zip table.
How often do I need to upload new postal code data?	The U.S. Postal Service provides updated data files on a periodic basis. See their web site for more information.
Does the postal code data upload also create tax rate information?	The LZPS job does not create Zip/City/State Tax records. You can use the Setting Up the Zip/City/State (Postal Code) Table (WZIP) option to create tax records at the postal code level if needed; however, you might not need these records at the postal code level if you set tax rates at the SCF level, or if you use the generic tax integration to calculate tax.
There are still records in the USPS City/State/Zip work table. Does this indicate a problem?	This does not indicate a problem. The LZPS job does not clear the records in the work table after processing an upload; instead, it clears the records when it begins a new upload.
What if there is a file both in the FILE_STORAGE table and the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE?	If you use the File Storage API, you should not ordinarily have an upload file in both the FILE_STORAGE table and the location specified in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE property; however, if you do, the file in the FILE_STORAGE table is processed and the file in the CWDIRECTCP_ USPS_UPLOAD_ FILE location is deleted.